Home

ACS850 Standard Program Firmware Manual

1. Ra da eke eR ERROR RC la Ri 54 Local o ince acia acd 0 770077 pode an b o o on aS 54 External control ocio aa dada A Ron E ECRIRE CREE ROCA KC ARCA RC Rc al 55 Operating modes of the drive ens 55 Speed control mode LT 55 Torque control mode 90000 55 Special control Modes kx eu ri ma b a la da dad b a qae ees 55 6 Table of contents 4 Program features What this chapter contains anana aaae 57 Application MACOS PPP 58 Automatic fault resets 115v aya da add RC La d 58 eg DTP 58 Constant A rrr LP 59 Ai c arrecare NN 59 DC voltage control 44 oda aue Ec dd dada 59 Overvoltage control 2512452226000 ls bi ce id carr iaa 59 Und rvoltade control ices asias boy ba DOR aa ds 60 Voltage control and trip limits llli 60 Brake Chopper sauce duz A dade eee AAA ROSA AO a 61 Drive tosdmnve INK yaa aaa risa bee ee d PCR a oe yari 61 Emergency Stop DI MTM 62 Encoder SUDDONM ua a knee bag ee eae oe eee Ra ka s b 62 Energy opui surtido web CN dV eR Lobe Sneed da der NE 62 Fieldbus control SOL CR EROR Cors m sala dia es c asc 63 rx ike wee ye Eee od be DGS PEEP AAA sees 63 Kela aT AT P o 0 00 ES 64 Peak value loge 64 Amplitude loggers RUR RR E AUR OO RAO 64 Maintenance Counters yc
2. 237 Fieldbus addresses rr 238 Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication 238 32 bit integer value pointers 000000 ll 1 62 238 32 bit integer bit pointers rr 239 Parameter groups 1 9 ex e eee di 240 Parameter groups 10 99 e corra Dar Sel Rod ae ae SOR EC Pc E Robe GED eee des rs 243 8 Fault tracing What this chapter contains 259 Safety rrr 259 Alarm and fault indications oya 50e x d are ori aci cR OI I otn a att 259 HOW Aa mansa ido aa Ho daban a mm 260 Fault history 3009080000 260 Alarm messages generated by the drive 260 Fault messages generated by the drive 268 9 Fieldbus control What this chapter contains 277 System overview hh 278 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module 279 Drive control parameters dua da deed ERR a a E OE 281 The fieldbus control interface RR 282 Table of contents 9 The Control Word and the Status Word 283 Actual values aa 283 FBA communication profile qa aco RR A a AAA 283 Fieldbus Teterences nicas a id ed 284 Stat
3. dureuun v0 0 MOPUIM peeds 061 q gt e qi 0 q lt e e qe q Sav q lt e e q Sav q lt e e Aejap peeds 01937 2061 yu peeds oJez 90761 as q peeds 20 6 1 se peeds IQON tL 10 p ds z 1Jepoou3 OL LO peeds Japo9u3 90 10 11 peeds JOJON 6061 p ds Control block diagrams 289 0492 no due 19 20790 PP dwey L 1a 20790 4 0 60 p ds ejes 0 AdVHS 8 dNVE euin dois NA 2122 aun 200 11 ZZ BuiBBof euin v OL ZZ euin edeus 6022 yoep euin edeuss 80 Zz zove euin edeus 0 zz ooe euin adeys 90 zz zeu 98q 9022 z w 99v pU ZZ Leun 980 0 zz Lau 99v ZO ZZ Jes 93p 99Y LO ZZ Bujeos peeds 10761 BuibBor c 14 20 90 dois W3 S 10 10790 X H dines p ds voco ayes je1 peeds zo oe Jeued feoo7 LL 114 10790 4 FC zo gt q 1290 6 114 10790 4431 UlEW yaz 92 20 speeds jeong lqeu p ds 2211 0 2 ui dwey ZL 14 20790 0 lqeu peeds sod 0 0Z p ds u nulxeyy LO OZ 0 ejqeue p ds Ban pO 0Z p ds u nululN zo oz 0 sqe uiu Jespeeds 60 LZ pedureuun jas peeds 60 20 pejs Bor 20701 Bof US p ds 01 12 peys z5or 80 0L
4. mn a Drive to drive link XD2D Safe Torque Off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start XSTO Control panel connection Memory unit connection 88 Application macros Torque control macro This macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is required Torque reference is given through analog input AI2 typically as a current signal in the range of 0 20 mA corresponding to 0 100 of rated motor torque The start stop signal is connected to digital input DI1 direction signal to DI2 Through DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control A constant speed 300 rpm can be activated through DI4 Default parameter settings for Torque control macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 237 Torque control Na Namem macro default Application macros 89 E Default control connections for the Torque control macro External power input 24VI 2V DC 184 Relay output RO1 Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A i NO COM XRO1 Relay output RO2 Modulating 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A N Relay output RO3 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A o mz x e o m ipe AA pigital input ground DEN 57 5 N Digital inputfoutput ground DOG z O 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC Digital input output ground 24V D
5. RA 16 2222 m 2m 02 15 AI6 scaled REAL 32 szres szs 2m 16 0 27 m 2ms orpo REAL 16 0 227 m 2m orpo REAL 16 0227 mA 2m 0218 404 REL 16 0 227 m 2m 02 20 Fregin REAL 32 032767 Hz 2509 02 21 Fregout REAL 32 0 3267 Hz 250 umm LT g r m 1 OxFFFFFFFF emm eene OxFFFFFFFF mm NS eee 2147483647 peer pean IS amem 17777 2147483647 0230 DZD main ov Pb 16 0x0000 0xFFFF 500us 0231 1626 followercw Pb 16 0x0000 0xFFFF 2ms 1 P 1771 1 2147483647 pee pee 117 2147483647 02 34 Panelref REAL 32 32768 32768 mm 10ms 0235 FEN DI saus Pb 16 0 08 os 3 Control values 03 03 SpeedRefunramp REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 250s 03 05 SpeedReframped REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 260us 03 06 SpeedRefused REAL 32 30000 30000 rpm 250us 03 07 Speed eror t REAL 32 30000 30000 rem 250s 03 08 Acc comp torg REAL 16 1600 160 56 03 09 Torq ref sp ci REAL 16 1600 160 260us 03 17 Torq reframped REAL 16 1000 1000 260us 03 72 Torq refsplim REAL 16 1000 1000 250us 03 13 Torq ere TC REAL 16 16001600 2508 03 14 Torq refused REAL 16 1600 160 260us 03 15 Brake torg mem REAL 1
6. 16 09 User set sel Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power up Notes Fieldbus and encoder parameters groups 50 53 and 90 93 respectively are not part of the user parameter sets Any parameter changes made after loading a set are not automatically stored they must be saved using this parameter IO mode Load user parameter set using parameters 16 11 User IO sel 10 lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi 16 10 User set log Shows the status of the user parameter sets see parameter 16 09 User set sel Read only No user sets have been saved A user set is being loaded Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set 4 Set1 IO act User parameter set 1 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User IO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set2 IO act User parameter set 2 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User IO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set3 IO act User parameter set 3 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User IO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set4 IO act User parameter set 4 has been selected by parameters 16 11 64 User IO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set1 par act User parameter set 1 has been loaded using parameter 16 09 User set sel Set2 par act User parameter set 2 has been loaded using parameter 16 09 256 User set sel Set3 par act User parameter set 3 has been loaded using parameter 16 09
7. CONT CANCEL If you want to continue press Press if you LOC t PAR BACKUP want to stop the operation If the downloading is Initializi ng param continued the display shows a message about it restore ope ration 00 00 40 The ACS850 contro panel Downloading continues drive is being restarted LOC R PAR BACKUP Restarting drive The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of R PAR BACKUP completion Restoring down loading all parameters Downloading finishes LOCU PAR BACKUP Finishing restore Operation 1 Parameter 5 If you try to backup and restore parameters between different firmware versions the panel shows you the following parameter error information Restore operation starts normally LOC R PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 Firmware version is checked LOC R VER CHECK You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are FIRMWARE VERSION not the same UIFI 1100 O UIFI 1010 0 OK PRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL 00 00 CONT Scroll the text with keys CAD an and Cw LOC R VER CHECK NCEL To continue press Ew Press ES to stop the FIRMWARE VERSION operation PRODUCT 25 3 OK CANCEL 00 00 CONT The ACS850 control panel 41 If the downloading is continued the display shows a LOCI PAR BACKUP message about it Initializing param restore operation 00 00 Downloading continues drive is being restarted LOCU PAR BAC
8. The nevv value is shovvn in the parameters list Hovv to select the monitored signals You can select vvhich signals are monitored in the Output mode and hovv they are displayed vvith group 56 Panel display parameters See page 23 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values Note f you set one of the parameters 56 01 56 03 to zero in the output mode you can see names for the tvvo remaining signals The names are also shovvn if you set one of the mode parameters 56 04 56 06 to Disabled The ACS850 control panel 29 LOC PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src C Y 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC t PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src CMV 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC B PARAMETERS 1407 DIO2 out src LOC t PAR EDIT 5601 61 param CANCEL 00 00 NEXT LOC B PAR EDIT 5602 01 param CANCEL 00 00 NEXT LOC t PAR EDIT 5603 61 param CANCEL 00 00 NEXT 30 The ACS850 control panel B Assistants Assistants are routines that guide you through the essential parameter settings related to a specific task for example application macro selection entering the motor data or reference selection In the Assistants mode you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows how assistants are invoked The Motor Set up Assistant is
9. Upper limit for supervision 2 100 32768 00 33 08 Superv2 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 2 See parameter 33 05 Superv2 func 32768 00 Lower limit for supervision 2 100 32768 00 1 1 33 09 Superv3 func Selects the mode of supervision 3 Disabled Supervision 3 not in use Low When the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv3 act 1 falls below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi High When the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must fall below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv3 act falls below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi Abs High When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must fall below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo parameter 33 09 Superv3 func 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 1073742082 01 04 Motor current see page
10. B Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three signals change the direction of the motor rotation e set the speed frequency torque or position reference e adjust the display contrast Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing EZ repeatedly The top right corner of the display shows the LOC t reference value The center can be configured to 49 10 show up to three signal values or bar graphs see page 29 for instructions on selecting and modifying 7 the monitored signals DIR 00 00 MENU How to change the direction of the motor rotation If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly REM Y until you get there 49 10 HZ 0 504 10 7 x DIR 00 00 T MENU 0 50 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode 00 00 MENU To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse AV shown on the status line or vice versa press e How to set the speed frequency torque or position reference in the Output mode See also section Reference Edit on page 48 If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly REM amp 30 00rpm until you get there 49 10 Hz 0 5 m A 10 7 x
11. CANCEL 00 00 NEXT Select the correct sign with keys CA and WM and LOC U REF EDIT press Select the correct numbers with keys CAN and and after each number is selected press bi 1250 rpm CANCEL 00 00 SAVE After the last number is selected press lt Go to the LOC 5 1250 00rpm Output mode by pressing The selected reference value is shown in the status line 49 s 10 HZ m A 10 7 x DIR 1 00 00 MENU B Drive Info In the Drive Info option you can view information on the drive The ACS850 control panel 49 Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view drive info Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go to the Drive info option by selecting DRIVE INFO on the menu with keys A and SY 7 and pressing The display shows information about the drive You can scroll the information with keys A and 7 Note The information shown may vary according to the firmware version of the drive DRIVE NAME Drive name defined as a text in DriveStudio commissioning and maintenance tool DRIVE TYPE e g ACS850 DRIVE MODEL Type code of the drive FW VERSION See page 44 SOLUTION PROGRAM Version information of the active solution program BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM Version information of the solution program template STANDARD LIBRARY Version information
12. 0 0 O o o 16 a Co 16 16 16 32 32 16 16 16 32 0 30 0 100 s 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 10 000 V 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 10 000 V 32768 32768 1500 000 55 32768 32768 ELS 1500 000 3 02 Al1 max REAL 3 03 REAL 3 04 REAL 3 05 REAL 3 06 REAL 3 07 REAL 3 08 REAL 13 09 REAL 0 30 0 100 s S 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 10 000 V 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 10 000 V 32768 32768 MEN 100 000 244 Additional parameter data Default Type Data Range len g Factory macro 13 10 Al2 min scale REAL 32768 32768 NE 100 000 13 12 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 22 000 mA 13 13 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA 13 14 AI3 max scale REAL 32768 32768 ME 1500 000 13 15 AI3 min scale REAL 32768 32768 pow 0 000 1847 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 22 000 mA 13 18 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA 13 19 Al4 max scale REAL 32768 32768 1500 000 13 20 Al4 min scale REAL 32768 32768 0 000 1322 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 22 000 mA 12 23 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA 13 24 AI5 max scale REAL 32768 32768 how 1500 000 13 25 AI5 min scale REAL 32768 32768 WEN 0 000 13 27 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 22 000 mA 13 28 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA A Taa 59595 83r AG mise REM z Taa Tom pararse emm Oa T a 0 PssrWwevim ewm os T x 1233 Ars
13. 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Parameters 113 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIOS as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 77 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 10 Fault reset sel Selects the source of the external fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 gt 1 Fault reset Note A fault reset from the fieldbus is always observed regardless of this setting DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 11 Run enable Selects the source of the external run enable signal If the run enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if running 1 Run enable Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running bit 3 bit 4 277 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status bit 5 Digital inp
14. 20 A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B D Overcompensated speed controller The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration compensation Proportional Speed integral reference reference Derivative Actual speed Settings Parameter group 23 Speed ctrl page 158 76 Program features Thermal motor protection The motor can be protected against overheating by the motor thermal protection model e measuring the motor temperature with temperature sensors This will result in a more accurate motor model E Thermal motor protection model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 When power is applied to the drive for the first time the motor is at ambient temperature defined by parameter 31 09 Mot ambient temp After this when power is applied to the drive the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature 2 Motor temperature is calculated using the user adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected Note The motor thermal m
15. Actual value Non inverted source of 27 16 0 Wake up level Time Inverted source of 27 16 1 Time Settings Parameter group 27 Process PID page 170 The PID control macro can be activated from the control panel main menu by selecting ASSISTANTS Firmware assistants Application Macro PID control See also page 86 Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog inputs Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage 0 2 10 V or 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA input by a jumper on the JCU Control Unit Each input can be filtered inverted and scaled The number of analog inputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions 72 Program features Settings Parameter group 13 Analogue inputs page 119 Programmable analog outputs The drive has two current analog outputs Each output can be filtered inverted and scaled The number of analog outputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 15 Analogue outputs page 139 Programmable digital inputs and outputs The drive has six digital inputs a digital start interlock input and two digital input outputs One digital input DI6 doubles as a PTC thermistor input See section Thermal motor protection on page 76 One of the digital input outputs can be used as a frequency input one as a frequency output The number of digital inputs outputs can be increased by usin
16. Control block diagrams 291 apou HP JOJO 5066 0 2 ui dwey ZL 14 2090 0 2 no dwey y 14 Z0 90 pueululoo p ds p ds 1se1 195 21 3 14 LO ZL 1200 aued LL 14 L0 90 H 22 3 SO ZI BuibBor s 10 z0 90 aav q 8907 6 14 10790 XVn NIN 3noHOL 033459 Ho 1X3 0121 9 1 JeJ DIOL EEO aav XVIN NIN ANDYOL Qqaads PPV UN i p ds zo oz p ds wnwixey 10 0Z uidi peeds Jo10 N LO LO uoneluuli peeds umop dues bio 19 bio uinuuluiW 7O 7Z Je1 p ds o ds jeJ buo 60 0 jou anbjo uu ds jas biol 2160 X Jes bIOL LO vZ Eo eJeus peo G0 pz biol LLY0 0 2 ul dwey ZL 114 20790 oJez no dwey 14 Z0 90 bso LUNUIXEN 0 yz z434 aza dn bio 90 vc 1334 020 2438 93 1438 94 zv LIV OY3Z Jes ppe biol Z0 pz uonooejes uoneoyipoui 292 Control block diagrams 4 H Old SseooJud pO bO no did sseoo4d 40 70 gt did SSe20Jd eue doaie ZZZ ejep dn exeM 92 2 I dn axem Sz 2 deals rZ 42 d ls 62 2 epouu d ls 22 2 L LWNWIUIW did 6122 m unulxeui 0148 2 poul did 1 2 F ul o qid
17. ID run can only be performed in local control i e when drive is controlled via PC tool or control panel ID run cannot be performed if parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar ID run must be performed every time any of the motor parameters 99 04 99 06 99 12 have been changed Parameter is automatically set to Standstill after the motor parameters have been set With permanent magnet motor the motor shaft must NOT be locked and the load torque must be 1096 during the ID run Normal ReducedlStandstill Ensure that possible Safe Torque Off and emergency stop circuits are closed during ID run Mechanical brake is not opened by the logic for the ID run No motor ID run is requested This mode can be selected only if the ID run Normal Reduced Standstill has already been performed once Normal Normal ID run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID run takes about 90 seconds This mode should be selected whenever it is possible Notes The driven machinery must be de coupled from the motor with Normal ID run if the load torque is higher than 2096 or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SA
18. S 40 Motor control Additional parameter data 253 Type Data REAL24 REAL24 enum 32 32 Slip gain Voltage reserve A A olo olo A 0 o ul o Force open loop IR compensation REAL24 A A Ol 65 olo N o 32 E 5 o 5 A N o gt y o S A N o 16 32 16 16 16 16 1 Brake ctrl enum Brake acknowl Bit pointer UINT32 UINT32 REAL UINT32 UINT32 REAL Val pointer Open delay 42 05 42 06 42 07 42 08 42 09 42 10 42 11 42 12 Close delay 0 1000 1000 1000 96 Close speed Close cmd delay Reopen delay Brake open torq 3 3 3 N Open torq src Brake close req Bit pointer Brake hold open Bit pointer O Brake fault func Close flt delay enum UINT32 A WY AJA No N N N S S Co A ol K o 5 N o N A K 3 3 5 o 44 01 44 02 44 03 44 04 44 05 44 06 44 07 44 08 44 09 44 10 44 11 44 12 44 13 44 14 44 15 Ontime1 func 0b00 0b11 Ontime1 src Bit pointer UINT32 enum 0 2147483647 0b00 0b11 0b00 0b11 0 2147483647 0 2147483647 0b00 0b11 0 2147483647 0 2147483647 0b00 0b11 0 2147483647 13140000 Ontime1 limit Ontime1 alm sel Ontime2 func 32 32 Ontime2 src Bit pointer UINT32 enum Ontime2 limit 0 2147483647 Ontime2 alm sel Edge count1 func Edge count1 src Bit pointer UINT32 UINT32 enum Edge cou
19. filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware approximately 0 25 ms time constant This cannot be changed by any parameter 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant time constant 1000 lt 15 13 02 Al1 max A emma LXLNZQOAECU fI O Td the maximum value for 7 OCcC x7 7U input Al1 The input 7 OCcC x7 7U is selected with jumper J1 on the JCU Control Unit 22 000 22 000 Maximum AI1 value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 03 Al1 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input Al1 The input type is selected with jumper J1 on the JCU Control Unit 22 000 22 000 Minimum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 120 Parameters 13 04 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input AI1 value defined by parameter 13 02 A 1 max Al scaled Al mA V 32768 000 Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 05 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input Al1 value defined by parameter 13 03 A 1 min See the drawing at parameter 13 04 A 1 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum value 1000 1 32768 000 13 06 AI2 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI2 See parameter 13 01 AI1 filt time 01000 30 000 s 000 30 0
20. of the speed controller Too great a gain may cause speed oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain 1 T Integration time Tp Derivation time 0 Error value Controller output Controller output K x e e Error value If gain is set to 1 a 10 change in error value reference actual value causes the speed controller output to change by 10 Note This parameter is automatically set by the speed controller autotune function See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode 0 00 200 00 Proportional gain for speed controller 100 1 Parameters 159 23 02 Integration time 0 00 600 00 s Defines the integration time of the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1 The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable If parameter value is set to zero the l part of the controller is disabled Anti windup stops the integrator if the controller output is limited See 06 05 Limit vvord1 The figure belovv shovvs the speed controller output after an error step vvhen the error remains constant Controller output Gain 1 T Integration time gt Tp Derivation time 0
21. 13 26 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input Al6 See parameter 13 01 AI1 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 13 27 Al6 max Defines the maximum value for analogue input Al6 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 AI6 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 28 Al6 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input Al6 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 AI6 minimum value 1000 1 unit 11 000 V Parameters 125 13 29 AI6 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input Al6 value defined by parameter 13 27 A 6 max Al scaled 13 30 Al6 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input Al6 value defined by parameter 13 28 A 6 min See the drawing at parameter 13 29 AI6 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al6 value 32768 000 13 31 Al tune Triggers the AI tuning function Connect the signal to the input and select the appropriate tuning function Al tune is not activated Al1 min tune Current analogue input signal value is set as minimum value of AI1 into parameter 13 03 A 1 min The value reverts back to No action automatically Al
22. 1800 000 Ramp shape at start of deceleration 1000 1s S 158 Parameters 22 09 Shape time dec2 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the end of the deceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time acc1 0 000 1800 000 Ramp shape at end of deceleration 1000 15 5 22 10 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function i e the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 0 000 1800 000 Acceleration time for jogging 1000 15 5 22 11 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function i e the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling to zero 0 000 1800 000 Deceleration time for jogging 1000 1s S 22 12 Em stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an emergency stop OFF3 is activated i e the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling to zero Emergency stop activation source is selected by parameter 10 13 Em stop off3 Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw Note Emergency stop OFF1 uses the active ramp time 0 000 1800 000 Emergency stop OFF3 deceleration time S 23 Speed ctrl Speed controller settings For an autotune function see parameter 23 20 PI tune mode 23 01 Proport gain Defines the proportional gain K
23. 2 EN 25 2005 uu 509 64 24 AL2 0 to 10 REAL 64 25 AL2 10 to 20 REAL Additional parameter data 257 Data Default S se ie s SI RE 18 eapon REA e SIT Rea 6 ws mess wu x e 64 32 32 AL2 80 to 90 REAL p 100 90 Enc module sel 0001 Encoder tse emm 146 5002 Encader2sel emm 16 2004 TTL ecto set onm s 16 16 ra None HEH None HE Disabled l Fault Pe Done Mal cl al 91 Absol enc conf 01 01 Sine cosine nr TOS 16 97 08 Abs emm 16 97 05 Rev count bis UTS2 36 16 Eg mus o 0 65535 sisse Um ata pum ssmeme umm T 19 5 9125 ssi daa omar eum 6 o T May eum t6 vs tonn Bim Ssmoe eum 6 oa m sss pr ssiran nros eum t6 m 9127 Ssizerprese eum 6 s ww pis Emdamode emm Tefo maps r r Ensat eum 6 os om 92 Resolver conf 09201 Resol polepars umt e re ns 1 Gl Gl Gl MI Ml so wot ta cal e g li Ml rm l 258 Additional parameter data om e una s D D Rahde Default g Factory macro Pat rising Quee 2 po p x T x o 5 enum enum Ext 102 sel 95 Hw configuration
24. Constant speed sel3 Start interlock 0 Stop DIIL gt QO DIO1 DIO2 VRE e Analog input Al1 EXT1 Reference Speed ref1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 AGN Al1 Al1 Al2 Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper AI2 current voltage selection jumper Analog output AO1 Current 3 ulp ADT Curent t o rap x AO2 3 Analog output AO2 Speed 96 L L EA Hi Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper AI2 lt m U m m Drive to drive link termination jumper ER Drive to drive link XD2D Safe Torque Off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start XSTO Control panel connection Memory unit connection Parameters 93 Parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the parameters including actual signals of the control program Note By default a selective list of parameters is shown by the drive panel or DriveStudio All parameters can be displayed by setting parameter 16 15 Menu set sel to Load long Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by the drive Actual signals can be monitored but not adjusted by the user Parameter groups 1 9 typically contain actual signals Bit pointer setting A parameter setting that points to the value of a bit in another parameter usually an actual signal or that can be fixed to 0 FALSE or 1 TRUE When adj
25. Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 D2D ref1 02 32 D2D ref see page 101 1073742368 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 42 11 Brake hold open Selects the source for the activation of the brake open command hold 1 Hold active 0 Normal operation Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 204 Parameters DI5 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 pi 565 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 55 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 99 42 12 Brake fault func Defines hovv the drive reacts in case of mechanical brake control error If bra
26. See parameter group 20 Limits Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl To determine whether problem is with acknowledgement signal or brake check if brake is closed or open Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl To determine whether problem is with acknowledgement signal or brake check if brake is closed or open Check PC tool or control panel connection Check control panel connector Replace control panel in mounting platform Contact your local ABB representative Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 and or Slot 2 Check that option modules or Slot 1 2 connectors are not damaged To determine whether module or connector is damaged Test each module individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2 272 Fault tracing Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code ENCODER1 0x7301 Encoder 1 feedback fault f fault appears during first start up before encoder feedback is used Check cable betvveen encoder and encoder interface module FEN xx and order of connector signal wires at both ends of cable If fault appears after encoder feedback has already been used or during drive run Check that encoder connection wiring or encoder is not damaged Check that encoder interface module FEN xx connection or module is not damaged Check earthings when distur
27. Selects faults that are automatically reset The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding fault is automatically reset The bits of the binary number correspond to the following faults Overcurrent Overvoltage Undervoltage Al min Line converter 32 02 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 32 03 Trial time Number of automatic resets 1 32 03 Trial time Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See parameter 32 02 Number of trials 1 0 600 0 s Time for automatic resets Parameters 183 32 04 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 32 01 Autoreset sel Resetting delay 33 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision 33 01 Superv1 func Selects the mode of supervision 1 Disabled Supervision 1 not in use Low When the signal selected by parameter 33 02 Superv1 act 1 falls below the value of parameter 33 04 Superv1 lo bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi High When the signal selected by parameter 33 02 Superv1 act 2 exceeds the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must fall below the value of parame
28. U U U U U U hm hm mH mH mH mH A V Hz pm Nm ol O O O O O ol O O sel esl s el esl s xili ol ol O O O O Nol A ol ol Ol NI Ol Oi x S S S S k e laal el oOlololo 3 3 3 3 eiololo lolsis olDniY iD im is o S 5 5 gt Fault tracing 259 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter lists the alarm warning and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive The Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive Alarm and fault indications An alarm or a fault message indicates abnormal drive status Most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information If not an ABB representative should be contacted The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication The alarm fault code is displayed on the 7 segment display of the drive The following table describes the indications given by the 7 segment display E followed by error code System error See appropriate drive hardware manual A followed by error code Alarm See section Alarm messages generated by the drive on page 260 F followed by error code Fault See section Fault messages generated by the dr
29. alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func 208 Parameters 44 14 Edge count2 func Configures rising edge counter 2 The counter is incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 44 15 Edge count2 src switches on unless a divisor value is applied see parameter 44 17 Edge count2 div After the limit set by parameter 44 16 Edge count2 lim is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 22 Edg cnt2 alm sel is given and the counter is reset The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04 12 Counter edge2 Bit 3 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 7 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached UNE TT MEN See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 44 16 Edge count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 2 See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 2 1 44 17 Edge count2 div Divisor for rising edge counter 2 Determines hovv many rising edges increment the counter by 1 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 2 44 18 cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 2
30. used here as an example Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the LOC S MAIN MENU 1 uz EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on Y ASSISTANTS 1 the menu with keys A and lt Y_ and pressing Firmware assistants Application assistant EXIT 00 00 SEL The Motor Set up assistant under Firmware assistants is LOC CHOICE used as an example Select assistant Select Firmware assistants with keys CAS and Cw Application Macro and press sx Motor Set up EXIT 00 00 OK Select Motor Set up with keys A and SY 2 and LOC PAR EDIT press A 9904 Motor type AM 0 EXIT 1 00 00 SAVE Select the appropriate motor type with keys 4 and LOC UPAR EDIT Sv 2 9904 Motor type PMSM 1 EXIT 00 00 SAVE To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter press x After all the parameters of the assistant are set the Assistants menu is displayed You can then select another assistant or exit the Assistants mode The ACS850 control panel 31 LOC UPAR EDIT 9905 Motor ctrl mode 0 EXIT 00 00 SAVE To abort an assistant press EZ at any point 32 The ACS850 control panel E Changed Parameters In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro defaul
31. 0 5 mA or V 1 Al1 gt max signal value exceeds the value defined by equation par 13 02 max 0 5 mA or V 2 Al2 lt min Al2 signal value falls below the value defined by equation par 13 08 Al2 min 0 5 mA or V 3 Al2 gt max Al2 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation par 13 07 Al2 max 0 5 mA or V Example If parameter value is set to 0b0010 bit 1 Al1 gt max is selected 14 Digital I O Configuration of digital input outputs and relay outputs p 14 01 Dl invert mask Inverts status of digital inputs as reported by 02 01 DI status 1 Invert DI 1 Invert DI2 1 Invert DI3 1 Invert DIA 1 Invert DI5 1 Invert DI6 Reserved 1 14 02 DIO1 conf Selects whether DIO1 is used as a digital output or input 5 Output DIO1 is used as a digital output 14 03 DIO1 out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO1 when 14 02 DIO1 conf is set to Output 03 16 Brake command see page 101 1073742608 Bit 0 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073743361 Enabled Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073808897 Started Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 1073874433 Parameters 127 No Namevaiue Desorption FOES Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbrevi
32. 00 24 00 00 86400 9605 Sia dayi Denes he week day on which tme period begs Monday Time period 1 starts on Monday Tuesday Time period stars on Tuesday eooo Wekessy Tine porod T sar on Wednesday RO Monday Time period 1 ends on Monday 1 Time period 1 ends on Tuesday 196 Parameters Thursday Time period 1 ends on Thursday Time period 1 ends on Saturday 6 3507 Same Deines te sert tme or ime proz 7 00 00 00 Start time for time period 2 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 08 Stop time2 Defines the stop time for time period 2 E 1 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 2 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 3509 Sade Dsesteweskmyonwhch meperoiZbese Monday Time period 2 stars on Monday foo Tuesday Time period 2starsonTuesdey ooo Time period 2 starts on Thursday 00 00 00 Start time for time period 3 1 1s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 12 Stop time3 Defines the stop time for time period 3 td 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 3 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 EE E Parameters 197 No WawNaus O 1 9574 Sop Dsinss he ve day on which tme porod Sens Monday Tine prod ends on Mendy 0 36 15 Start time4 Defines the start time for time period 4 00 00 00 Start time for time period 4 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 16 Stop time4 Defines the stop time for time period 4 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 4
33. 000 s 20 000 s 60 000 s 60 000 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 0 000 s 0 000 s 3 000 s 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 12 Em stop time REAL 23 Speed ctrl 10 00 0 500 s 0 000 s 3 o o 248 Additional parameter data Type Data Range Default len g Factory macro tae acco Pane Rea ie nun CI 2508 Speed aadive EST Speed winFune emm 6 o2 pn 7 17 pooeraiminso REM o T Essjeefamis REAL 6 onw wm 122 24 Torque ref 2 25 Critical speed i 1 26 Constant speeds 2601 Const speed tine Po 3 o Al2 scaled Zero 300 0 300 0 1 000 Hz NEN 55 CRM s 0 000 s os tem mm tem mm mm NI 3 O o 1 0 000 s Disable 30000 30000 0 rpm 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0b00 0b11 0b00 C FALSE C FALSE ER MESA Eos Pow C FALSE mm em N 30000 30000 30000 30000 0 rpm o Additional parameter data 249 Default Type Data Range len 9 Factory macro 27 Process PID aros PID Toki RE s2 300 2706 PID mim Rem s sor 2707 PID ii max REM s2 300 RIR Rem s mm 7709 PiD iksn RE x6 v s s
34. 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 817 Sams Defies the weekday on which ime perod begs Tuesday TmepsoiisamsonTweiy ooo Thursday Time period 4 starts on Thursday 7 7 36 19 Boost signal Boosting can be used to extend the timer enable signal for the time defined by parameter 36 20 Boost time The boost time starts when the boost signal changes state from 1 to 0 DIG N Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 5 po o po 450 us 52 Uu T 198 Parameters DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 m DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 36 20 Boost time Boost time See parameter 36 19 Boost signal 55 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 36 22 00 00 00 Boost time 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 Timed func Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 1 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 1 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary numbe
35. 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074529793 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1073874434 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1073939970 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074005506 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074333186 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer Pointer Parameters 137 14 57 Freq in max Defines the maximum input frequency for DIO2 when parameter 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq input fpio2 Hz 14 57 14 59 Signal real 3 32768 Hz DIO2 maximum frequency 1 1 Hz 14 58 Freq in min Defines the minimum input frequency for DIO2 when parameter 14 06 DIO2 conf is setto Freq input See diagram at parameter 14 57 Ered in max 3 32768 Hz DIO2 minimum frequency 1 1 Hz 14 59 Freq in max scal Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum input frequency defined by parameter 14 57 Freq in max See diagram at parameter 14 57 Freq in max 32768 32768 Real value corresponding to DIO2 maximum frequency 1 14 60 Freq in min scal Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum input frequency defined by 14 58 Freq in min See diagram at parameter 14 57 Freq in max 32768 32768 Real value corresponding to DIO2 minimu
36. 3 o 3 A A Co o A a 5 A a 55 N Co hb cl Ml o 2 L O 0 1000 1 100 0 A A A nl a olo Cool o A H Te p mee J S NIT a a a o O 5 N A A AY A NI ONION ololo ol N a A A A Go S 45 N a 0 10000 0 10000 0 1 1000 0 150 0 150 A e co A co Br power max cnt 32 Br temp faultlim 1 Br temp alarmlim Data storage1 16 Data storage2 16 6 6 8 07 9 Dat o A 20 c s A AT GA Go ol 69 a A 0 2 0 Q o AY A KO l olo mp a e Co Data storage3 UINT32 1 Data storage4 UINT32 1 Data storage5 UINT32 32 49 06 UINT32 32 2 A A A oO ol S 5 aj A 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 G I 0 R S 0 Q o o 49 07 Data storage UINT32 32 49 08 Data storage8 UINT32 3 Additional parameter data 255 Data Rande Default len 9 Factory macro 50 Fieldbus emm 18 Ont o 002 cammssn eum 8 os x Salas ness em 18 9 2 Speed 1222212212202272 eum 18 o oe Rea rec E 99 Exe 50 10 Fba sw b14 src Bit pointer 32 C FALSE 50 11 Fba sw b15 src Bit pointer 32 C FALSE 51 FBA settings 51 01 FBA type UINT32 16 0 65536 16 0 65536 1
37. 30 12 60 to 70 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 60 and 70 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70 100 1 64 31 12 70 to 80 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 70 and 80 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80 100 1 64 32 12 80 to 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 80 and 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90 100 1 64 33 AL2 over 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that exceed 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90 100 1 224 Parameters 90 Enc module sel Activation of encoder resolver interfaces See also section Encoder support on page 62 90 01 Encoder 1 sel Activates the communication to optional encoder resolver interface 1 Note It is recommended that encoder interface 1 is used whenever possible since the data received through that interface is fresher than the data received through interface 2 On the other hand when position values used in emulation are determined by the drive software the use of encoder interface 2 is recommended as the values are transmitted earlier through interface 2 than through interface 1 None Inactive FEN 01 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder interface Input TTL encoder input with commutation support X3
38. 4 30000 30000 rpm 27 Process PID Configuration of process PID control See also section Process PID control on page 70 27 01 setpoint sel Selects the source of setpoint reference for the PID controller Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 27 02 PID fbk func Defines how the final process feedback is calculated from the two sources selected by parameters 27 03 PID fbk1 src and 27 04 PID fbk2 src A cc nn wo feedbacks souresused fe Saeed ENEE s TR PDT we Sees he source of process teeda z ECC CN Ta scaled 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 95 1073742341 AI2 scaled 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 95 1073742343 FBA ref1 02 26 FBA main ref1 see page 100 1073742362 FBA ref2 02 27 FBA main ref2 see page 100 1073742363 D2D ref1 02 32 D2D ref1 see page 101 1073742368 Parameters 171 D2D ref2 02 33 D2D ref2 see page 101 1073742369 D2D ref1 02 32 D2D ref see page 101 1073742368 D2D ref2 02 33 D2D ref2 see page 101 1073742369 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 27 05 PID fbk1 max Maximum value for process feedback 1 32768 00 Maximum value for process feedback 1 100 1 32768 00 27 06 PID fbk1 min Minimum value for process feedback 1 32768 00 Minimum value for process feedback 1 100 1 32768 00 27 07 fbk2 max Maximum value for process feedback 2 5 A 32768 00 Maximum value for proces
39. 512 User set sel 1 2 16 32 128 Parameters 147 Set4 par act User parameter set 4 has been loaded using parameter 16 09 1024 User set sel 16 11 User IO sel lo When parameter 16 09 User set sel is set to O mode selects the user parameter set together with parameter 16 12 User IO sel hi The status of the source defined by this parameter and parameter 16 12 select the user parameter set as follows Status of source Status of source User parameter defined by par defined by par set selected 16 11 16 12 16 12 User IO sel hi See parameter 16 11 User IO sel lo Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 16 14 Reset ChgParLog Resets the log of latest parameter changes Reset not requested normal operation Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Reset Reset log of latest parameter changes The value reverts automatically to Done No change has been requested Load short Load short parameter list Only a selective list of parameters will be displayed Load long Load long parameter list All parameters will be displayed 16 15 Menu set sel Loads a short long or custom parameter list By default short parameter list is displayed by drive No parameter list is active Short parameter list is active Long parameter list is active All parameters are displayed 2 16 17 Power unit Selects the unit of power for parameters such as 01 22 Power inu out 01 23 Motor power and 99 1
40. 91 2 uep did SL 7Z euin uep Ald rU 2 r euin dlid CL 72 uleB did ZL 4c m euin 4G did 01 ZZ ues yg did 6072 Kel X Cid 60 22 cl 020 4e 020 g l dy 4431 gd p reos 217 pajeos LIV OJeZ Jes juiodjes ald 10 22 91 uiu ZAG Cid 90 22 57 cl 84 Ue a4 p leos ZIV p leos LV O19Z xew diq did 20 112 945 Ald Y Lc uiu biqi did 90 7c KR 7 0 gd aunt AA did 20 2 2 pajeos LIV OJOZ 248 0 014 0 2Z xew biq did 90 Lc did Sse oJg Control block diagrams 293 sJiedejod 0 10 4 ejeos wou bio 6Z LO Jed WOU JON 66 Jed 10j0UJ s sn 26 uie dils 6007 Juano uunullxeyy 5002 doo uedo 29104 90 0t yo nui 4 Ze LO Jes uii bao 90 02 cenbJoj WNWIUI 0170Z z nbuo uunulxey 60707 ejyejnojeo pue is peeds JoJo tL L0 EN Jepouu 100 Lanbso uinuututw 80702 Lenbio wunwixey 0102 nbuo 40 0 N 907 L0 r Hp 1o As pun ZO LP L n 10727 udi peeds JOJO 10710 snes uii biol 70 90 OL o g l biol 6160 p sn biol 60 p sn Jal xn 3 2 60 enbJo JOMOg Sjeufis oipo uonesueduioo ulI 0 04 57 o uui Buejeues d 6102 GHOA Am Y N ELBE ui 010 d ZL OZ POA SANO A N 2186 INIL ISNO
41. 9907 Mot nom voltage 3908 Mot nom fre Mot nom spee EXIT 00 00 EDIT 34 The ACS850 control panel B Fault Logger In the Fault Logger option you can view the drive fault history see the details of the most recent faults read the help text for the fault and make corrective actions start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the LOC t MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Otherwise press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Fault Logger option by selecting FAULT LOC 1 MESSAGE LOGGER on the menu with keys A and S W P and fault histo ry pressing If there are no faults in the fault history corresponding text will be shown If there is a fault history the display shows the fault log LOCU FAULT LOGGER 1 starting with the most recent fault The number on the 36 LOCAL CTRL LOSS row is the fault code according to which the causes and 29 04 08 10 45 58 corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing page 259 EXIT 00 00 DETAIL To see the details of a fault select it with keys CaNand IL OC R LOCAL CTRL LOSS and press x TIME Scroll the text with keys A and 10 45 58 To return to the previous display press CZ CODE FAULT CODE EXTENSION EXIT 00 00 DIAG DIAG If you want help in diagn
42. Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80 100 1 64 22 AL1 80 to 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 80 and 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90 100 1 64 23 AL1 over 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that exceed 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90 100 1 64 24 AL20 to 10 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 0 and 10 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10 100 1 64 25 12 10 to 20 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 10 and 20 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20 100 1 64 26 12 20 to 30 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 20 and 30 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30 100 1 64 27 12 30 to 40 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 30 and 40 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40 100 1 64 28 AL2 40 to 50 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 40 and 50 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50 100 1 64 29 AL2 50 to 60 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 50 and 60 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60 100 1 64
43. DIR 7 00 00 MENU 22 The ACS850 control panel If the drive is in remote control REM JET the status LOC amp 30 00rpm line switch to local control by pressing The display 4 9 10 Hz briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode 2 b A 10 7 x DIR 1 00 00 MENU To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press A The value changes immediately It is stored in the permanent memory of the drive and restored automatically after power switch off To decrease the value press CW DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly LOC 5 until you get there 49 10 HZ 0 50 4 10 7 x _ DIR 00 00 MENU MENU To increase the contrast press keys x and CAN simultaneously To decrease the contrast press keys wl and 2 simultaneously DIR 00 00 MENU The ACS850 control panel 23 B Parameters In the Parameters option you can view and change parameter values Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC B MAIN MENU PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters o
44. FRSA 00 16 FMBA 01 17 FFOA 01 18 FFOA 02 19 FSEN 01 20 FEN 31 21 FIO 21 22 FSCA 01 23 FSEA 21 09 21 Option slot2 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 2 See 1 1 signal 09 20 Option slot1 09 22 Option slot3 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 3 See 1 1 signal 09 20 Option slot1 10 Start stop Start stop direction etc signal source selections 1 10 01 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 1 EXT1 Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running No start or stop command sources selected In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1 parameter 10 02 Ext1 start in1 The state transitions of the Source bit are interpreted as follows via par 10 02 The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10 02 Ext1 start in1 and 10 03 Ext1 start in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 State of source 2 Command via par 10 02 via par 10 03 gt 1 The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus D2D The start and stop commands are taken from another drive through the D2D Drive to drive Control Word In1F In2R The source selected by 10 02 Ext1 start in1 is the forward start signal the source selected by 10 03 Ext1 start in2 is the reverse start signal tate of source tate of sou
45. Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case of a communication break 30 04 Mot phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is detected No action taken BRENNEN unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable The drive generates alarm EARTH FAULT The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 2 30 06 Suppl phs loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is detected 5 No action taken The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE 176 Parameters 30 07 Sto diagnostic Selects how the drive reacts when the drive detects that the Safe Torque Off function is active while the drive is stopped The Safe Torque Off function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the drive output stage thus preventing the inverter from generating the voltage required to rotate the motor For the wiring of the Safe Torque Off circuit see the appropriate hardware manual Notes This parameter is for supervision only The Safe Torque Off function can activate even when this parameter is set to No Fault STO 1 LOST STO 2 LOST is activated if safety circuit signal 1 2 is lost when the drive is in stopped state and this parameter is set to Alarm or No Fault The drive trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF 1 The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF 2 30 08 Cross connection Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and motor cable connection i e input power cable is c
46. Safe Torque Off function is active See parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic 0 Safe Torque Off function is inactive 1 Reserved 12 Ramp inQ 11 Ramp Function Generator input is forced to zero NE Normal operation 3 Ramp hold 1 2 Ramp Function Generator output is held P RM Normal operation 4 Ramp out 0 1 Ramp Function Generator output is forced to zero iud Normal operation Reserved Parameters 105 06 03 Speed ctrl stat Speed control status word Information peed act Actual speed is negative neg Zero speed 1 Actual speed has reached the zero speed limit parameters 79 06 Zero speed limit and 19 07 Zero speed delay Above limit 1 Actual speed has exceeded the supervision limit parameter 79 08 Above speed lim The difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference is within the speed window parameter 19 10 Speed window Reserved PI tune Speed controller autotune is active active PI tune 1 Speed controller autotune has been requested by parameter 23 20 PI request tune mode 7 5 8 Speed controller autotune has been completed successfully done Limit word1 Limit vvord 1 nformation Tord lim Drive torque is being limited by the motor control undervoltage control current control load angle control or pull out control or by the torque limit parameters in group 20 Limits pd ctl tlim peed controller output minimum torque limit is active The limit is
47. See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func Parameters 209 44 19 Val count1 func Configures value counter 1 This counter measures by integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 44 20 Val count1 src When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44 21 Val count1 lim an alarm is given if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter The signal is sampled at 1 second intervals Note that the scaled see the FbEq column at the signal in question value of the signal is used The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04 13 Counter value1 Bit 4 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 lt Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 20 Val count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 94 1073742081 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 44 21 Val count lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 1 121 44 22 Val count1 div Divisor for value counter 1 The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integr
48. The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 Al3 minimum value 1000 1 unit 11 000 V 122 Parameters 13 14 Al3 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input AI3 value defined by parameter 13 12 A 3 max Al scaled 13 15 Al3 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input AI3 value defined by parameter 13 13 A 3 min See the drawing at parameter 13 14 AI3 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al3 value 32768 000 13 16 AIA filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input Al4 See parameter 13 01 AI1 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 13 17 Al4 max Defines the maximum value for analogue input Al4 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 4 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 18 Al4 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input Al4 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 Al4 minimum value 1000 1 unit 11 000 V Parameters 123 13 19 Al4 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input Al4
49. aci aci ic OE ote sen Cee Eb deed eae d a ed 65 Mechanical brake control duaya yaaa o ER Rd aaa aa A 66 Process PID control er 70 Sleep function for process PID control 70 Programmable analog inputs eee 71 Programmable analog outputs l 72 Programmable digital inputs and outputs o 72 Programmable relay outputs 00 rr 72 Programmable protection functions 72 Start interlock parameter 10 201 ee 72 External fault parameter 30 01 eee 73 Local control loss detection parameter 30 03 73 Motor phase loss detection parameter 30 04 73 Earth fault detection parameter 30 05 00 eee eee 73 Supply phase loss detection parameter 30 06 73 Safe Torque Off detection parameter 30 07 73 Switched supply and motor cabling parameter 30 08 73 Stall protection parameters 30 09 30 12 73 Scalar motor control Lo 74 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive 74 Signal supervision dues x sonora dob on Rx C Rd echt eee ee XR
50. always positive A falling Channel A Falling edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Note When single track mode has been selected by parameter 93 02 Enc1 type the speed is always positive Parameters 229 Auto rising One of the above modes is selected automatically depending 4 on the pulse frequency as follows Pulse frequency of the channel s lt 2442 Hz A amp B all 2447 884 Hz gt 484 Hz Auto falling One of the above modes is selected automatically depending on the pulse frequency as follows Pulse frequency of the channel s 2442 Hz A amp B all 2442 4884 Hz gt 4884 Hz A falling ECT E aa SRTR exersion salad noson None DECI 5 02 En ozsa DI DETECTO 5 95 Hvv configuration Diverse hardvvare related settings 95 01 Ctrl boardSupply Selects hovv the drive control unit is povvered nternal 24V The drive control unit is povvered from the drive povver unit it is mounted on This is the default setting External 24V The drive control unit is powered from an external power supply 230 Parameters 95 03 Temp inu ambient Defines the maximum ambient temperature The value is used by the drive cooling diagnostics Drive ambient temperature 97 User motor par Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model 97 01 Use given params Activates the motor model parameters 97 02 97 14 and the rotor angle offset parameter 9
51. and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative Check fan operation and connection Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power Check brake chopper and brake resistor connection Ensure brake resistor is not damaged Fault tracing 269 Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 BC SHORT CIRCUIT 0x7 113 BC OVERHEAT 0x7181 BR OVERHEAT 0x7112 CURR MEAS GAIN 0x3183 CABLE CROSS CON 0x3181 Programmable fault 30 08 Cross connection SUPPLY PHASE 0x3130 Programmable fault 30 06 Suppl phs loss MOTOR PHASE 0x3182 Programmable fault 30 04 Mot phase loss ID RUN FAULT OxFF84 Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal fault limit Brake resistor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 48 06 Br temp faultlim Difference between output phase U2 and W2 current measurement gain is too great Incorrect input power and motor cable connection i e input power cable is connected to drive motor connection Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection all three phases are not connected Motor ID Run is not comp
52. are in the LOC t MAIN MENU Sa cer EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Time amp Date option by selecting TIME amp DATE oc R TIME DATE 1 guie menu with keys LA and SY and pressing XT TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBILITY on LOC UY CLOCK VISIB 1 the menu press select Show clock Hide clock with keys CEN an and Hide cloc press b vl or if you vvant to return to the previous yw displa out making changes press EZ EXIT 00 00 SEL To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the oc TIME FORMAT 1 menu pres and select a suitable format With keys Ee ul Press SJ to save or EF to 12 hour cancel your changes CANCEL 00 00 SEL The ACS850 control panel 37 To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the LOC U DATE FORMAT 1 menu press wl and select a suitable format Press x to save or EP to cancel your changes CANCEL 00 00 OK To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press LOC U SET TIME SEL NN Specify the hours with keys A and SY 2 and press 41 Then 7 the minutes Press to save or EZ to cancel your changes CANCEL OK To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press OC UY SET DATE Specify the first part of the date day or month depending 19 0 3 2 00 8 o
53. by parameters 27 23 Sleep level and 27 24 Sleep delay The sleep and wake up delays 27 24 Sleep delay and 27 26 Wake up delay are effective External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by parameter 27 27 Sleep ena The sleep and wake up delays 27 24 Sleep delay and 27 26 Wake up delay are effective 174 Parameters Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor speed is below this value longer than the sleep delay 27 24 Sleep delay the drive shifts to sleep mode Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 27 23 Sleep level When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter resets Defines the wake up limit for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value is below a set level 27 23 Sleep level longer than the wake up delay 27 24 Sleep delay 27 26 Wake up delay Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See parameter 27 25 Wake up level When the process actual value falls below the wake up level the wake up counter starts When the process actual value exceeds the wake up level the counter resets IEEE T DIUI when parameter 27 22 Sleep mode is set to External Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 DI Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations o
54. connected Bit selection Relative address of to solution program solution program variable Note Bit pointer parameters connected to a solution program are read only via fieldbus 240 Additional parameter data Parameter groups 1 9 Data Update No Name Tye t n Unit T Notes 01 01 Motor speed pm REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 260us 07 02 Motorspeed REAL 32 000 100 2ms 07 03 Output frequency REAL 32 30000 3000 Hz 2ms 07 04 Motor current REAL 32 0 3000 A mm 07 05 Motor current REAL 16 0 100 2ms 07 06 Motortorque REAL 16 1600 1600 2ms 07 07 Dovoltage REAL 32 0 290 v 2ms 07 08 Encodert speed REAL 32 3276832768 mm 250us 01 09 Encoderfpos REAZ4 32 o1 rev 2500s 32768 32768 rmm 28048 07 11 Encoder pos REALZ 32 0 1 rev 2500s 32708 32768 rw 2ms 01 13 Pos andenc REAL 32 3276832768 rev 2ms 01 74 Motor speed est REAL 32 30000 30000 2ms 07 15 Temp inverter 10 100 zm 07 16 Temp brk chopper REALZA 46 9 100 2ms gt 07 17 Motor temp e 07 18 Motor temp 010 ms 01 19 Used supply vok REAL 16 0 400 V toms 07 20 Brake res load REALZA 16 0 000 S0ms 01 27 Cpuusa
55. criteria for example a document code in the search field AL EDER fal ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 3AUA0000045497 Rev C EN EFFECTIVE 2009 07 20 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet http www abb com
56. direction through DI5 The reference signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to analog inputs Al1 and Al2 respectively A constant speed 300 rpm can be activated through DI4 Default parameter settings for Hand Auto macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 237 Hand Auto macro Application macros 85 B Default control connections for the Hand Auto macro External power input 24VI 2V DC 184 Relay output RO1 Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A i NO COM XRO1 Relay output RO2 Modulating 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A N Relay output RO3 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A 2 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC Digital input output ground 24V DIGN 24VD DIOGND XD24 XRO3 XRO2 DI DIO grounding selection jumpers Digital input DI1 EXT1 Stop Start Digital input DI2 EXT1 Direction Digital input DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Digital input DI4 Constant speed 1 Digital input DI5 EXT2 Direction Digital input DI6 or thermistor input EXT2 Stop Start Start interlock 0 Stop 9 N D 4 al DIIL gt Digital input output DIO1 Output Ready Digital input output DIO2 Output Running DIO1 DIO2 Reference voltage VRE 9 N Reference voltage VRE AGN Analog input Al1 EXT1 Reference Speed ref1 Current or voltag
57. dod 11 oues TT DET 11 Safety INSWUCIONS iia aia RO daa 11 a A ap die ri ii A ida 11 A Un A aE R 12 Relata Manual xido iS dd A a a 12 2 The ACS850 control panel What this chapter contains een eee eens 13 Features amaia cee ula s aia hem EE wea ia dd 13 Installati n CRT TD tases od m R Sa eee ee 14 Mechanical installation o 14 Electrical installation ROCA e Che aia SOR CR REOR a s 14 Layout bio debido andado 15 Stat s Ane did A dai 16 Operating instructions id a 17 Basics oT peration 75 77 17 LIST OF ASRS 3 4 send ed OU de 7 7 18 Help and panel version Any mode 19 Basic operations Any mode eee 20 IDI s MDC ala ras ma rama 21 Parameters 7707777775 77 al ES o EN 23 ASSISAINS Cr 30 Changed Parameters te ete 32 Fault Logger II O IA g 0 EE 34 Time ex Date ovina 7 36 Parameter Backup izar Des a a aa s Ke 38 10715 TR 46 KEelerenee Edit vs cima S083 279 en ERROR e A 48 DING Er 49 Parameter Change Log nnn 50 3 Control locations and operating modes What this chapter contains he 53 Local control vs
58. drive running 1 1 Normal operation Stop by ramping The deceleration time is defined by parameter 22 12 Em stop time The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1 With the drive stopped e 1 Starting allowed 0 Starting not allowed Disabled The start inhibit function is disabled 116 Parameters 11 Start stop mode Start stop magnetization etc settings 11 01 Start mode Selects the motor start function Notes Selections Fast and Const time are ignored if parameter 99 05 is set to Scalar Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected Fast or Const time With permanent magnet motors Automatic start must be used Fast The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start The pre magnetizing time is determined automatically being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size This mode should be selected if a high break away torque is required Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Const time The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 11 02 Dc magn time This mode should be selected if constant pre magnetizing time is required e g if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake This setting also guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetizing time is set l
59. local control RA Milk ref KE fieldbus local control o fieldbus local control id 27 Reserved 28 CW B28 Freely programmable control bits See parameters m E W B29 50 08 50 11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter 30 de CVV B31 Parameters 99 No Name Value Description 02 24 FBA main sw Status Word for fieldbus communication See also chapter Fieldbus control page 277 Bi Name Value formation SSCS Ready Enabled Roonaan ena sas ea 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating LL running EN operation is enabled Drive is running and following given reference EN operation is disabled Drive is not following given reference ME example it is modulating during magnetization 5007 20 ora Co EmenencyoFFZ easi Emsiop 1 Emergency slop OFFS amo aree Orta T o 5 Ack startinh 1 fS tart inhibit is active Start inhibit is inactive Mame oa MEME setpoint EN is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value i e the difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within the speed window defined by parameter 19 10 Speed window 0 Drive has not reached setpoint continued 100 Parameters No Name Value Description Name Value Information OS continued 519 pan is limited by any of the torque limits Operation is within the torque limits is within the torq
60. lower 31 02 Mot temp1 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection 1 When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31 01 Mot temp1 prot Note If one FEN xx module is used parameter setting must be either KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN The FEN xx module can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model which uses the motor thermal time constant parameter 31 14 Mot therm time and the motor load curve parameters 31 10 31 12 User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve if the motor is overheated WARNING The model does not protect the motor if A it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt KTY 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 1 is used for the temperature supervision Note This selection does not apply to FEN 01 KTY 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder
61. m r 100 poon REAL ow f w 7 16 PiD mrin Steme TCLS eum is o2 ma 27 76 PID maximum RE s2 saree 00 Po minimum Rem x mese wo 77 22 Sibep mode eum 6 o2 REAL 32 725 Wake ip si REA 32 vo 27 26 Wakeup delay ona 22 0 30 T s 00s zrzrSemem Bipme 32 erase 30 Fault functions SIE R stpomer 2 cm oo eum ree emm 6 vv 0b000 0b111 250 Additional parameter data Type Data Rande Default len 9 Factory macro 30 10 Stall curr lim REAL 1600 300 0 30 11 Stall m hi REAL 31 Mot therm prot 0 3600 20s Iw sss m are ora serine umrz 16 5 99 SIR prt enum T T 31 02 Mot temp1 src Emma sros worempramum rar 6 v s me 31 05 Mot temp2 prot T II ros mariemp2se ewm 18 steer 0032 10 urn uz mmm hetin mim wraz s 32 Automatic reset 33 Supervision 38 01 Supert tune emm 16 58 02 Super act TR pointer 32 53 05 Seri REAL 32 3506 superv act Val pointer 32 fa Suoraa vaientr 732 34 User load curve 0 300 100 10000 06000000 06111111 600 120 32768 3
62. not connected in a follower drive Reset By default not connected in a follower drive Freely assignable through bit pointer settings EXT1 EXT2 selection 0 EXT1 active 1 EXT2 active By default not connected in a follower drive Parameters 101 02 31 20 follower cw Drive to drive control word sent to the followers by default See also parameter group 57 D2D communication Bt mamta 0 Bo 2 Sn Reset Freely assignable through bit pointer settings 15 EXTT EXT2 selection EXT1 active 1 EXT2 active 02 32 20 ref1 Drive to drive reference 1 received from the master 02 33 D2D ref2 Drive to drive reference 2 received from the master 02 34 Panel ref Reference given from the control panel 100 1 rpm 02 35 FEN DI status Status of the digital inputs of FEN xx encoder interfaces in drive option slots 1 and 2 Examples 000001 01h DI1 of FEN xx in slot 1 is ON all others are OFF 000010 02h DI2 of FEN xx in slot 1 is ON all others are OFF 010000 10h DI1 of FEN xx in slot 2 is ON all others are OFF 100000 20h DI2 of FEN xx in slot 2 is on all others are OFF 03 Control values Speed control torque control and other values 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 03 03 SpeedRef unramp Used speed reference before ramping and shaping in rpm 03 05 SpeedRef ramped Ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm 03 06 SpeedRef used Used speed reference in r
63. of analogue input AI2 See parameters 13 09 1000 7 1 unit Al2 max scale and 13 10 AI2 min scale 02 08 Value of analogue input AI3 in V or mA For input type 1000 7 1 unit information see the extension module manual 02 09 AI3 scaled Scaled value of analogue input AI3 See parameters 13 14 1000 7 1 unit AI3 max scale and 13 15 A12 min scale 96 Parameters 02 10 Al4 Value of analogue input Al4 in V or mA For input type 1000 1 unit information see the extension module manual 02 11 Al4 scaled Scaled value of analogue input Al4 See parameters 13 19 1000 1 unit Al4 max scale and 13 20 Al4 min scale 02 12 Al5 Value of analogue input Al5 in V or mA For input type 1000 1 unit information see the extension module manual 02 13 Al5 scaled Scaled value of analogue input Al5 See parameters 13 24 1000 1 unit max scale and 13 25 min scale 02 14 Al6 Value of analogue input Al6 in V or mA For input type 1000 1 unit information see the extension module manual 02 15 AI6 scaled Scaled value of analogue input AI6 See parameters 13 29 1000 1 unit AI6 max scale and 13 30 Al6 min scale 02 16 1 Value of analogue output AO1 in mA 1000 1 mA 02 17 A02 Value of analogue output AO2 in mA 1000 1 mA 02 18 AO3 Value of analogue output AO3 in mA 1000 1 mA 02 19 A04 Value of analogue output AO4 in mA 1000 1 mA 02 20 Freq in Frequency input value of DIO2 when it is used as a frequency 1000 1 Hz i
64. of the standard library TECHNOLOGY LIBRARY Optional Version information of the technology library POWER UNIT SERNO Serial number of the power stage JPU MEM UNIT HW SERNO Serial number in manufacturing the memory unit JMU MEM UNIT CONFIG SERNO Serial number in configuring the memory unit JMU EX Press 7 to return to the Main menu LOC UMAIN MENU PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR X EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC DRIVE INFO DRIVE NAME DRIVE TYPE ACS850 DRIVE MODEL EXIT 00 00 LOC Y DRIVE INFO FW VERSION UIFI 1010 0 SOLUTION PROGRAM BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM EXIT 00 00 50 The ACS850 control panel E Parameter Change Log In the Parameter Change Log option you can view latest parameter changes made via control panel or PC tool edit these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view latest parameter changes and edit parameters Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go to the Parameter Change Log option by selecting PAR CHG LOG on the menu with keys A and 7 and pressing If there are no parameter changes in the history corresponding text will be shown If there are parameter changes in the history the panel shows a list of the last parameter changes starting from the most recent change The order of
65. parameter 33 06 Superv2 act 1 falls below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi High When the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the signal must fall below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act falls below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi Abs High When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must fall below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo parameter 33 05 Superv2 func 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 1073742082 01 04 Motor current see page 94 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 SpRef ramped 03 05 SpeedRef ramped see page 107 1073742597 Parameters 185 33 07 Superv2 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 2 See parameter 33 05 Superv2 func 32768 00
66. reaches a pre defined limit The counter can be set to monitor any parameter This feature is especially useful as a service reminder There are three types of counters Ontime counter Measures the time a digital source for example a bit in a status word is on Rising edge counter This counter is incremented whenever the monitored digital source changes state from 0 to 1 e Value counter This counter measures by integration the monitored parameter An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak exceeds a user defined limit 66 Program features Settings Parameter group 44 Maintenance page 205 Mechanical brake control A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped or not powered Parameters 03 15 Brake torq mem and 03 16 Brake command show the torque value stored when the brake close command is issued and the value of the brake command respectively Settings Parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl page 207 BSM Brake State Machine Depending on setting of parameter 42 12 Brake fault func From any state 1 BSM STOPPED 9 Fault Alarm BSM BRAKE NOT CLOSED START 10 3 Fault Alarm OPEN BRAKE START TORQUE BRAKE 4 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 e CLOSE State Symbol WIX Y Z NN State name W X Y Z State outputs operations W 1 Brake open command is active 0 Brake close command i
67. s 38400 38400 bit s 91 12 Hiperf node addr Defines the node address for HIPERFACE encoder i e when 7 parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is Hiperface Typically this parameter does not need to be set 0 255 HIPERFACE encoder node address 91 20 SSI clock cycles Defines the length of the SSI message The length is defined as the number of clock eycles The number of eycles can be calculated by adding 1 to the number of bits in an SSI message frame Used with SSI encoders i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is SSI 2 127 Length of SSI message 91 21 SSI position msb Defines the location of the MSB most significant bit of the position data within an SSI message Used with SSI encoders i e when parameter 97 02 Abs enc interf setting is SSI 1 126 Location of MSB bit number in SSI position data 91 22 SSI revol msb Defines the location of the MSB most significant bit of the revolution count within an SSI message Used with SSI encoders i e when parameter 97 02 Abs enc interf setting is SSI 1 126 Location of MSB bit number in SSI revolution count 91 23 SSI data format Selects the data format for SSI encoder i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is SS Parameters 227 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is SS 1000 kbit s baud rate 91 25 SSI mode Selects the SSI encoder mode Note This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI encoder is used in continuous mode i e w
68. signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if running tapa rated by 0207 Dr ns BS 1074070017 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 ica Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 19 Start inhibit Enables the start inhibit function The function prevents drive restart i e protects against unexpected start if the drive trips on a fault and the fault is reset the run enable signal is activated while the start command is active see parameter 10 11 Run enable control changes from local to remote or external control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or vice versa An active start inhibit can be reset with a stop command Note that in certain applications it is necessary to allow the drive to restart Enabled The start inhibit function is enabled 1 10 20 Start interl func Defines how the start interlock input DIIL on the JCU control unit affects the drive operation Off2 stop With the drive running 1 Normal operation 0 Stop by coasting The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1 With the drive stopped 1 Starting allowed 0 Starting not allowed Off3 stop With the
69. src Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO8 when 14 30 DIO8 conf is set to Output Fault Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074398721 Fault 1 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074529793 Parameters 133 14 34 DIO9 conf Selects whether DIO9 is used as a digital output or input Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer when 14 34 DIO9 conf is set to Output Enabled Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 1073808897 Started Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073874433 Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073939969 Alarm Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074202113 Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074267649 S oa Zero speed Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 105 1073808899 Above limit Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 105 1073874435 when 14 38 DIO10 conf is set to Output Enabled Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073808897 Started Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073874433 Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073939969 Alarm Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074202113 Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074267649 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074398721 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 1
70. the brake make up time of the brake 7 operating delay when closing specified by the brake manufacturer Brake close Brake close delay 100 1s Defines the brake close speed an absolute value See parameter 42 04 Close delay Brake close speed Parameters 203 42 06 Close cmd delay Defines a close command delay i e the time between when brake close conditions are met and when the close command is given 0 00 10 00 s Brake close command delay 100 15 42 07 Reopen delay Defines a reopen delay i e the time between when the close command is given and when the brake can be reopened 0 00 10 00 s Brake reopen delay 100 15 42 08 Brake open torq Defines the motor starting torque at brake release in percent of the motor nominal torque when parameter 42 09 Open torq src is set to P 42 08 1000 0 1000 0 Motor starting torque at brake release 42 09 Open torq src Selects the source for the brake open torque value motor starting torque at brake release D2D ref2 02 33 D2D ref2 see page 101 1073742369 Brk torq mem 03 15 Brake torq mem see page 101 1073742607 P 42 08 Parameter 42 08 Brake open torq 1073752584 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 42 10 Brake close req Selects the source for the brake close open request 1 Brake close request 0 Brake open request Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running
71. the changes is also indicated with a number in the top right corner 1 stands for most recent change 2 the second latest change etc If a parameter has been changed twice it is shown as one change in the list The current value of the parameter and the parameter change date and time are also shown below the selected parameter You can scroll the parameters with keys A and SY 7 If you want to edit a parameter select the parameter with keys A and SY and press x Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LAS and To save the new value press eno the new value and keep the original press SAVE LOC C MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER LOC MESSAGE NO parameters available 00 00 LOC t LAST CHANGES 1 9402 Ext IO se None 11 09 2008 12 04 55 9401 Ext sel 9402 Ext IO2 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC B PAR EDIT 9402 Ext 102 sel None 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC t PAR EDIT 9402 Ext IO2 sel FIO 01 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE The ACS850 control panel 51 The parameter change is shown as the first one in the list LOC LAST CHANGES L of last parameter changes 9402 Ext I02 se Note You can reset the parameter change log by setting parameter 16 14 Reset ChgParLog to Reset 12 09 205 09 33 9402 Ext IO2 sel 9401 Ext I01 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT 52 The ACS850 control panel Control locations and operating modes 53 Control
72. the drive system can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed The energy saving tools calculate the energy saved in kWh and in local currency and as reduction in CO emissions all compared to the situation where the pump is directly connected to the supply Program features 63 Note The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45 08 Pump ref power Settings Parameter group 45 Energy optimising page 211 Fieldbus control See chapter Fieldbus control page 277 Jogging Two jogging functions 1 or 2 are available When a jogging function is activated the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed along the defined jogging acceleration ramp When the function is deactivated the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp One push button can be used to start and stop the drive during jogging The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to control the machinery locally Jogging functions 1 and 2 are activated by a parameter or through fieldbus For activation through fieldbus see parameter 02 22 FBA main cw The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive during jogging Note that they cannot be directly applied to jogging commands through fieldbus as those require no enable signal see parameter 10 09 Jog enable They also represent ho
73. there are substantial interferences in the speed measurement the filter time constant should be proportional to the total inertia of the load and motor in this case 10 30 of the mechanical time constant tmech hom Thom Ytot X 27 60 where Jiot total inertia of the load and motor the gear ratio between the load and motor must be taken into account nom motor nominal speed Thom motor nominal torque See also parameter 23 07 Speed err Ftime 0 000 10000 000 Time constant of the actual speed filter 1000 1 ms ms 19 06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit The motor is stopped along a speed ramp until the defined zero speed limit is reached After the limit the motor coasts to stop 0 00 30000 00 Zero speed limit 100 1 rpm rpm Parameters 149 19 07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position Without Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed Limit the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop 19 06 Zero speed limit With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop
74. to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 0 000 60 000 s Torque reference ramp up time 1000 1s 24 07 Torq ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp down time i e the time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero 0 000 60 000 s Torque reference ramp down time 1000 15 Parameters 167 25 01 Crit speed sel Enables disables the critical speeds function Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges activate the critical speeds function setthe critical speed ranges as in the figure below Motor speed rpm Drive speed Par 25 02 540 rpm Par 25 03 690 rpm 3 Par 25 04 1380 rpm Par 25 05 1590 rpm Critical speeds are disabled Critical speeds are enabled 25 02 Crit speed1 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 03 Crit speed1 hi 30000 30000 Low limit for critical speed 1 rpm 25 03 Crit speed1 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1 Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 02 Crit speed1 lo 30000 30000 High limit for critical speed 1 rpm 25 04 Crit speed2 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 05 Crit speed2 hi 30000 30000 Low limit for
75. value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 2 121 ds 44 27 Val count2 div Divisor for value counter 2 The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integration 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 2 44 28 Val cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func Pre selectable alarm for value counter 2 Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for value counter 2 1 44 29 Fan ontime lim Sets the limit for the cooling fan on time counter The counter monitors signal 01 28 Fan on time see page 95 When the signal reaches the limit alarm 2056 COOLING FAN 0x5081 is given 0 00 Alarm limit for cooling fan on time 35791394 11 h 44 30 Runtime lim Sets the limit for the drive run time counter The counter monitors signal 01 27 Run time counter see page 95 When the signal reaches the limit the alarm specified by parameter 44 31 Runtime alm sel is given 0 00 Alarm limit for the drive run time counter i 35791394 11 h Aen Pressiecabl lam forthe arive run tme counter 2 Parameters 211 Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter 5 44 32 kWh inv lim Sets the limit for the energy counter The counter monitors signal 01 24 kWh inverter see page 94 When the signal reaches the limit the alarm specified by paramet
76. y Ctrl boardSupply 5 03 Temp inu ambient 1 7 User motor par Use given params Rs user Rr user Lm user SigmaL user Ld user Lq user Pm flux user Rs user SI Rr user SI Lm user SI SigL user SI Ld user SI Lq user SI PM angle offset 99 Start up data Language Motor type Motor ctrl mode Mot nom current Mot nom voltage 3 Mot nom freq 99 13 IDrun mode ala olo Llo on o O S ol ol O O A A R GIGI Gl G o o m 0 MI xl x ol m l a 0 Las 4 SS M 2 By l l l l l SLS N h 2 S g S QO 210 n si 1516 o o 5 3 3 O o 1 1 1 1 0 55 Internal 24V Tae Tae Tae Tae D D D r 5 ol a 5 3 0 0 5 0 0 5 N N S 32 o CO l e null Dil N ol o o 1 ol ol ol NI NINI NIN 9 9 OD ay A 0 100000 0 100000 English 32 0 100 0 100 0 100000 o o ol ol NI NI NIN Al e 9 O Ol Ol j N 3 3 3 3 3 3 N a 32 N a N L EN m m m EUN Pu m NUN mu mu Hu oO ol NI NIN Al a ARI O 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 sis 6 6 6 6 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 D Es E uc JL 5 EA e LN EUN ELIT N 0 10000 0 10000 kW or hp o 0 2147483 647 Nm 0 000Nm 125 wl oa N 32 32 32 C U
77. 0 15 Em stop off1 Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw Note When an emergency stop signal is detected the emergency stop function cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled Encoder support The program offers support for two encoders or resolvers encoder 1 and 2 Multiturn encoders are supported only as encoder 1 Three optional interface modules are available TTL Encoder Interface FEN 01 two TTL inputs TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching Absolute Encoder Interface FEN 11 absolute encoder input TTL input TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching Resolver Interface FEN 21 resolver input TTL input TTL output for encoder emulation echo and two digital inputs for position latching HTL Encoder Interface FEN 31 HTL encoder input TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching The interface module is connected to drive option Slot 1 or 2 Note Two encoder interface modules of the same type are not allowed Settings Parameter groups 91 Absol enc conf page 225 92 Resolver conf page 228 and 93 Pulse enc conf page 226 Energy optimizer The energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency of
78. 0 Mot nom power E 3 1 1 2 1 16 16 Menu set active Shows which parameter list is active See parameter 16 15 Menu set sel Kilowatt 19 Speed calculation Speed feedback speed window etc settings 19 01 Speed scaling Defines the terminal speed value used in acceleration and the initial soeed value used in deceleration see parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp Also defines the rpm value that corresponds to 20000 for fieldbus communication with ABB Drives communication profile 0 30000 rpm Acceleration deceleration terminal initial speed 148 Parameters 19 02 Speed fb sel Selects the speed feedback value used in control Estimated A calculated speed estimate is used Enc1 speed Actual speed measured with encoder 1 The encoder is selected by parameter 90 01 Encoder 1 sel Enc2 speed Actual speed measured with encoder 2 The encoder is selected by parameter 90 02 Encoder 2 sel 19 03 MotorSpeed filt Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter i e time within the actual speed has reached 63 of the nominal speed filtered speed 01 01 Motor speed rpm If the used speed reference remains constant the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the actual speed filter Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another A very long filter time results in unstable control If
79. 0 rpm can be activated through DI4 Default parameter settings for PID control macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 237 5 Name default aor m Application macros 87 B Default control connections for the PID control macro External power input 24VI 2V DC 184 Relay output RO1 Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A e s COM XRO1 Relay output RO2 Modulating 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XRO2 Relay output RO3 Fault 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A 24 V DC 24V XRO3 2 XD24 Digital input DI2 DI2 Digital input DI3 Speed or Process control DI3 Digital input DI4 Constant speed 1 014 a x Digital input DI5 DI5 Digital input DI6 or thermistor input EXT2 Stop Start Start interlock 0 Stop DIIL Digital input output DIO1 Output Ready DIO1 Digital input output DIO2 Output Running DIO2 Reference voltage VRE XDIO Reference voltage VRE Analog input Al1 Process or Speed reference S Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Al1 Analog input Al2 Process feedback Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper AO1 Analog output AO1 Current sz g output AO1 Current o rap x Analog output AO2 Speed 96 SY Drive to drive link termination jumper Es 7 IN1 t
80. 00 s Filter time constant 7 time constant 1000 1s 1s Ee Al2 max CA Q lXTIRS AE A U the maximum value for analogue input AI2 The input type is selected with jumper J2 on the JCU Control Unit 22 000 22 000 Al2 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 08 12 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI2 The input type is selected with jumper J2 on the JCU Control Unit 22 000 22 000 Al2 minimum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V Parameters 121 13 09 12 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input AI2 value defined by parameter 13 07 A 2 max Al scaled 13 10 AI2 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input AI2 value defined by parameter 13 08 A 2 min See the drawing at parameter 13 09 AI2 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value 32768 000 13 11 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI3 See parameter 13 01 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 13 12 Al3 max Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI3 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 13 Al3 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI3
81. 0052 D2D CONFIG Configuration of the drive to Contact your local ABB representative 0x7583 drive link has failed for a reason other than those connected to the link and have the correct node address Check the drive to drive link wiring On a follower drive The drive Check the settings of parameters 57 06 has not received new Ref 1 src and 57 07 Ref 2 src on the reference 1 and or 2 for five master drive consecutive reference Check the drive to drive link wiring handling cycles 0054 D2D BUF OVLOAD Transmission of drive to drive Contact your local ABB representative 0x7520 references failed because of Programmable fault message buffer overflow 90 05 Enc cable fault 0055 TECH LIB Resettable fault generated by Refer to the documentation of the 0x6382 a technology library technology library 0056 TECH LIB CRITICAL Permanent fault generated by Refer to the documentation of the 0x6382 a technology library technology library 0057 FORCED TRIP Generic Drive Communication Check PLC status OxFF90 Profile trip command 0058 FB PAR ERROR The drive does not have a Check PLC programming 0x6320 functionality requested by Check settings of parameter group 50 PLC or requested functionality Fieldbus has not been activated 0059 STALL Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings 0x7121 region because of e g Check fault function parameters Programmable fault excessive load or
82. 0x7182 BC MOD OVERTEMP 0x7183 AUTOPHASING 0x3187 PU LOST 0x5400 PS COMM 0x5480 IN CHOKE TEMP OxFF81 Measured offset error of U2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Measured offset error of V2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Measured offset error of W2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Safe Torque Off function is active i e safety circuit signal 1 connected between X6 1 and X6 3 is lost while drive is at Stopped state and parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic is set to Alarm or No Safe Torque Off function is active i e safety circuit signal 2 connected between X6 2 and X6 4 is lost while drive is at stopped state and parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic is set to Alarm or No Error in changing Safe Torque Off supervision i e parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Fault Interface board between power unit and control unit temperature has exceeded internal fault limit Input bridge or brake chopper temperature has exceeded internal fault limit Autophasing routine see section Autophasing on page 58 failed Connection between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive is lost Communication errors detected between the JCU Control Unit and the p
83. 1 BR OVERHEAT 0x7112 BC OVERHEAT 0x7181 Estimated motor temperature based on motor thermal model has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Drive has received emergency OFF2 command No run enable signal is received Motor identification run is on Motor identification is required Drive has received emergency stop command OFF1 OFF3 Brake resistor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 48 07 Br temp alarmlim Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit To restart drive activate run enable signal source selected by parameter 10 11 Run enable and start drive Check setting of parameter 10 11 Run enable Switch signal on e g in the fieldbus Control Word or check wiring of selected source This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Wait until driv
84. 1 DC CHARGE COUNT Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x6182 2066 ONTIME1 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5280 2067 ONTIME2 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5281 2068 1 EDGE1 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5282 69 EDGE2 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5283 2070 VALUE1 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5284 2071 VALUE2 ALARM Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5285 2 e Fault tracing 267 Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code AUTOTUNE FAILED Speed controller autotune See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode 0x8481 routine did not finish successfully START INTERLOCK No Start interlock signal Check circuit connected to DIIL input 082 received 268 Fault tracing Fault messages generated by the drive Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code OVERCURRENT 0x2310 DC OVERVOLTAGE 0x3210 SHORT CIRCUIT 0x2340 DC UNDERVOLTAGE 0x3220 EARTH FAULT 0x2330 Programmable fault 30 05 Earth fault FAN FAULT OxFF83 IGBT OVERTEMP 0x7184 BC WIRING 0x7111 Output current has exceeded internal fault limit Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage Short circuit in motor cable s or motor Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to mi
85. 1 max tune Current analogue input Al1 signal value is set as maximum value of Al1 into parameter 13 02 Al1 max The value reverts back to No action automatically Al2 min tune Current analogue input Al2 signal value is set as minimum value of AI2 into parameter 13 08 2 min The value reverts back to No action automatically Al2 max tune Current analogue input Al2 signal value is set as maximum value of Al2 into parameter 13 07 Al2 max The value reverts back to No action automatically 13 32 Al superv func Selects how the drive reacts when analogue input signal limit is reached The limit is selected by parameter 13 33 Al superv cw The drive trips on an Al SUPERVISION fault 126 Parameters Spd ref Safe The drive generates an Al SUPERVISION alarm and sets the 2 speed to the speed defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref Safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Last speed The drive generates an Al SUPERVISION alarm and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 13 33 Al superv cw Selects the analogue input signal supervision limit Action selected by parameter 13 32 Al superv func is taken if Al1 lt min signal value falls below the value defined by equation par 13 03 min
86. 12 P motoring lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the motor in percent of the motor nominal power 0 0 1600 096 Maximum motoring power 10 196 20 13 P generating lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the inverter in percent of the motor nominal power 0 0 1600 0 Maximum generating power 21 Speed ref Speed reference source and scaling settings motor potentiometer settings 21 01 Speed ref1 sel Selects the source for speed reference 1 See also parameter 21 03 Speed ref1 func FBA ref1 02 26 FBA main ref1 see page 100 1073742362 FBA ref2 02 27 FBA main ref2 see page 100 1073742363 D2D ref1 02 32 D2D ref1 see page 101 1073742368 Parameters 153 D2D ref2 02 33 D2D ref2 see page 101 1073742369 02 34 Panel ref see page 101 1073742370 03 18 Speed ref pot see page 101 1073742610 PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 21 03 Speed refi func Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 21 01 Speed reri sel and 21 02 Speed ref2 sel to be used as speed reference 1 Signal selected by 21 01 Speed ref1 sel is used as speed reference 1 as such A S The subtraction 21 01 Speed ref1 sel 21 02 Speed ref2 ub sel of the reference sources is used as spe
87. 13 SpeedErr win lo When the speed error moves outside the window the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller parameter 23 01 Proport gain which the torque selector adds to the torque reference The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive Example In a load loss condition the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed If window control were inactive the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached Disabled Speed error window control inactive 23 09 Max torq sp ctrl Defines the maximum speed controller output torque Parameters 163 Absolute Speed error window control active The boundaries defined by parameters 23 12 SpeedErr win hi and 23 13 SpeedErr win lo are absolute Relative Speed error window control active The boundaries defined by parameters 23 12 SpeedErr win hi and 23 13 SpeedErr win lo are relative to speed reference 23 12 SpeedErr win hi Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window Depending on setting of parameter 23 11 SpeedErr winFunc this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window Depending on setting of parameter 23 11 SpeedErr winFunc this is either an absolute value or relative to speed r
88. 2 FEN 01 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder 2 Interface Input TTL encoder input X31 FEN 11 ABS Communication active Module type FEN 11 Absolute 3 Encoder Interface Input Absolute encoder input X42 FEN 11 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 11 Absolute 4 Encoder Interface Input TTL encoder input X41 FEN 21 RES Communication active Module type FEN 21 Resolver 5 Interface Input Resolver input X52 FEN 21 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 21 Resolver Interface Input TTL encoder input X51 FEN 31 HTL Communication active Module type FEN 31 HTL Encoder 7 Interface Input HTL encoder input X82 90 02 Encoder 2 sel Activates the communication to the optional encoder resolver interface 2 Note The counting of shaft revolutions is not supported for encoder 2 90 04 TTL echo sel Enables and selects the interface for the TTL encoder signal echo Note If encoder emulation and echo are enabled for the same FEN xx TTL output the emulation overrides the echo Disabled No echo interface enabled FEN 01 TTL Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder Interface Echo TTL encoder input X32 pulses are echoed to the TTL output FEN 01 TTL Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder Interface Echo TTL encoder input X31 pulses are echoed to the TTL output Parameters 225 FEN 11 TTL Module type FEN 11 Absolute Encoder Interface Echo TTL 3 encoder input X41 pulses are echoed to th
89. 246 Additional parameter data s ns ea m ww us fete REAL 6 0287 m 22000mA laaa REM 6 mA soma ar Aovsremax REX 32 3216832788 Sm 9 laas REM 02 areare 1 999 mmuons eme uw ery mmporw m RA Ww ms Tv T xs az nosonmx TH 8 2 m z m laran REM 6 mA 99m monem wea pw zama wee CAL 0b0000 0b1111 0b0000 16 System 16 01 lecaliock T 1500 sorsas onm LIT 19 Speed calculation 0 30000 mm Estimated 10000 ms 8000ms mm ms C FALSE Open 1 7 55 m Done MEA No m EE C FALSE MM 2 NECEM L C FALSE No request Short menu kx b 5 MI Ml NENES N e gt sik 3 5 S D o 1500 rpm Ros Above speed REA T 9 306 mm 0 5 N Additional parameter data 247 Data Range Default len g Factory macro 2002 Pos speed ena 7 cr 2004 Nev seeden siom 3 H TRUE 2008 Torgtm sei So 32 H liest REM 18 T 20 0 Wmmumtrwe REM T REAL 0 1600 300 0 21 Speed ref 2 o il scaled Zero Ref1 C FALSE 1 000 E o o 3 3 o 3 0 rpm 3 Reset 2 2 S a 22 Speed ref ramp z z 1 32 C FALSE 20
90. 2768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 32768 0b000000 0b111111 0b0000 0b1111 1 500 e ae s m m 2 s x vs Disabled Speed rpm Es pe y Lo jh 99 1 1 1 NENNEN ms WEE ME 2 11 AE ERE 01 01 m Additional parameter data 251 R Default e aa Buses REAL T vm e ejm rex s amp 9 6 10 toadiowima REM s omo 29 3820 Underoedime unz x6 0 199 f s Ws 35 Process variable 35 01 Sanan param Vapome 32 Seem 7 soz Signal max REAL 32 saree saree sm 35 05 Signa min RE s 3000000 A s r emm 8 3 3505 Proe varrunit emm 6 ow o sos Pr vertmex REAL 32 sooo 3507 Procvart n REX s az 3o sos sisnaz param Valpomer 32 duz 3509 Sionai REM s2 saree 300000 3870 Sinalamin REAL 32 saree saree SUI emm is os 3 Bsm mevazu emm 6 ow 4 5 3 Proe var m x REAL s2 saree 3000 Bsm Pcvazm REAL 32 sor sou 35 75 Siena param Vipomer 32 38 76 SinalSmax REAL 32 saree somo 35 77 Signet min REAL s 0000 5510 procrear eum 8 os 5 2777500007 al E 3520 Procvarsma
91. 34 Parameters No WameWaiue besorpin OE Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 Supervision1 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073743373 Supervision2 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073808909 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer Brake cmd 03 16 Brake command see page 107 1073742608 Fault Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 1074398721 Fault 1 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 1074529793 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer Parameters 135 14 43 RO1 Ton Defines the on activation delay for relay output RO1 Drive status RO1 status 14 43 RO1 Ton tog 14 44 RO1 Toff 0 0 3000 0 5 On activation delay for RO1 Defines the off deactivation delay for relay output RO1 See parameter 14 43 1448 RO2se Bslcisa arive signal to be connected to relay ouput ROZ Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074005506 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074333186 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 136 Parameters No Ebesis PA 1448 Rosse Ssleis a dive signal to be connected to relay ouput ROS 03 16 Brake command see page 101 Bit
92. 4 Torq ref used see page 101 Process act 04 03 Process act see page 102 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page ESE m Mum 5 520557 2572675 MER EUN 5077 Lowe ID 0500 ERRE Forumu WEE E Tuuuu 5555 m NN Co 194 Parameters 35 16 Signal3 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35 20 Proc var3 max 04 08 Process var3 35 17 35 16 Signal selected by 35 15 Signal3 param 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process 121 variable 3 value 35 17 Signal3 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 21 Proc var3 min See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process variable 1 1 3 value 35 18 Proc var3 dispf Scaling for process variable 3 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus AAA b AAA AA 35 19 Proc var3 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04 08 Process var3 process variable 3 See parameter 35 05 Proc var1 unit 1 35 20 Proc var3 max Maximum value for process variable 3 See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 32768 32768 Maximum value for process variable 3 1 1 35 21 Proc
93. 4 of parameter 06 74 is on if any one of the four timers is on Each time period can be assigned to multiple timers likewise a timer can be controlled by multiple time periods 78 Program features The figure below presents how different time periods are active in daily and weekly modes Time period 1 Start time 00 00 00 Stop time 00 00 00 or 24 00 00 Start on Tuesday Stop day Sunday Time period 2 Start time 03 00 00 Stop time 23 00 00 Start day Wednesday Stop day Wednesday Time period 3 Start time 21 00 00 Stop time 03 00 00 Start day Tuesday Stop day Saturday Time period 4 Start time 12 00 00 Stop time 00 00 00 or 24 00 00 Start day Thursday Stop day Tuesday Time period 1 weekly Time period 1 daily Time period 2 weekly Time period 2 daily Time period 3 weekly Time period 3 daily Time period 4 weekly Time period 4 daily Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Thursday gt gt v o 2 2 E Wednesday Thursday Wednesday A boost function is also available for the activation of the timers a signal source can be selected to extend the activation time for a parameter adjustable time period Timer active Timer enable signal Boost signal l laq Boost time Settings Parameter group 36 Timed functions page 194 Program features 79 User definable load curve The drive output can be limited by defining a user definab
94. 49 05 Data storage5 Data storage parameter 5 2147483647 32 bit data 2147483647 49 06 Data storage6 Data storage parameter 6 2147483647 32 bit data 2147483647 49 07 Data storage Data storage parameter 7 2147483647 32 bit data 2147483647 49 08 Data storage8 Data storage parameter 8 2147483647 32 bit data 2147483647 50 Fieldbus Settings for configuration of communication via a fieldbus adapter 50 01 Fba enable Enables communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter Disable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter disabled Enable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter enabled 50 02 Comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break The time delay is defined by parameter 50 03 Comm loss t out Communication break detection disabled Communication break detection active Upon a communication break the drive trips on fault FIELDBUS COMM and coasts to stop Spd ref Safe Communication break detection active Upon a communication break the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Last speed Communication break detection active The drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the p
95. 6 1000 1000 2ms 03 16 Brake command eum 16 0 1 2m 03 17 Fuxretused REAL24 16 0 200 2ms 03 18 Speedrefpot REAL 32 0000 30000 mm 10ms 04 01 Process act REAL 32 32768 32768 2m 0402 Prooess aci REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 04 03 Processact REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 242 Additional parameter data Data Update Name lean Pange Unit fme Notes 4 04 Process PID err REAL 32768 32768 2ms 4 05 Process PID out REAL 32768 32768 2 ms 4 06 Process vari REAL 32768 32768 10 ms 4 07 Process var2 REAL 32768 32768 10 ms 4 08 Process var3 REAL 32768 32768 10 ms 4 09 Counter ontime1 UINT32 0 2147483647 10 ms 4 10 Counter ontime2 0 2147483647 10 ms 4 11 Counter edge1 10 ms 4 12 Counter edge2 10 ms 4 13 Counter value1 10 ms 4 14 Counter value2 10 ms 06 Drive status 6 01 Status word1 Pb 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 6 02 Status word2 Pb 16 0x0000 0xFFFF 2ms 6 03 Speed ctrl stat Pb 16 0x0000 0xFFFF 250 us 6 05 Limit word1 Pb 16 0x0000 0xFFFF 250 us 507 Tora im status Pb 16 0x0000 oxFFFF_ 250 us 272 Zms 5 13 Superv status Pb 16 0600 0677 2 SR 6 75 Counter status P 16 0000000 oot 1 8 Alarms amp faults 20 222 225 Q 2 1 dais 8 04 Fault time lo time 205 Alarm word LE 8 06 Alarm word 2ms 207
96. 6 0 65536 16 16 5 FBA par2 UINT32 L 51 26 FBA par26 UINT32 52 FBA data in 61 52 12 FBA data in12 UINT32 53 FBA data out 53 01 FBA data out1 UINT32 FBA data out12 UINT32 Signal1 param UINT32 Signal2 param UINT32 56 05 INT32 56 06 INT32 Exe EA EA E 84 7 x s 1 us gt S n s S es S sss seme 16 0 9999 1 16 00 00 255 255 00 00 255 255 00 00 255 255 256 Additional parameter data CRA AE en Factory macro 8701 k m se emm Tul 207 T Does 702 comm osin eum 16 02 A 57 03 Tur 1 2 1 57 04 Fotowermask 7 S 32 0NDOO00000 0NTFFFFFFF 000000000 57 06 Fotower ov se Valpamnier 32 EA L G 57 12 Ref1 mc group UINT32 57 13 Next ref1 mc gro UINT32 57 14 Nr ref1 mc grps UINT32 1 on board 57 15 D2D com port 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 6 6 64 Load analyzer 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 6 6 100 00 1 2 2 2 3 20 zer ea HE mz Peal Es naz m E s oz A CAN 0 0 6 0 6 1 6 0 0 64 09 Current at peak REAL 64 10 Dc volt at peak REAL 64 11 Speed at peak REAL 0 2000 32768 32768 64 12 Date of reset UINT32 01 01 80 64 13 UINT32 00 00 00 23 59 59 3 3 3 3 3 64 03 Reset loggers Bit pointer 3 3 3 3 3 pe 7 25 po 509 NEN QN 5 2 05
97. 7 20 Notes Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is selected by parameter 99 13 IDrun mode The values of parameters 97 02 97 20 are updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Parameters 97 02 97 20 inactive UserMotPars The values of parameters 97 02 97 14 are used in the motor 1 model UserPosOffs The value of parameter 97 20 is used as the rotor angle 2 offset Parameters 97 02 97 14 are inactive AllUserPars The values of parameters 97 02 97 14 are used in the motor 3 model and the value of parameter 97 20 is used as the rotor angle offset 97 02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance Rg of the motor model 4 0 00000 0 50000 Stator resistance in per unit 100000 p u 1 p u 97 03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance Rg of the motor model Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 0 50000 Rotor resistance in per unit 100000 p u 1 p u 97 04 Lm user Defines the main inductance Ly of the motor model Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 Main inductance in per unit 100000 10 00000 p u 1 p u 97 05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance Ota Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 1 00000 Leakage inductance in per unit 100000 p u 1 p u 97 06 Ld user Defines the direct axis synchronou
98. 8 Saf 86 tall Load curve Load curve con U f curve conf Speed meas 08 08 Alarm word4 Alarm word 4 For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Option comm loss 1 Solution prog Motor temp2 09 System info Drive type program revision and option slot occupation information 09 01 Drive type Displays the drive type for example ACS850 09 02 Drive rating ID Displays the inverter type ACS850 xx of the drive 0 Unconfigured 101 03A0 102 03A6 103 04A8 104 105 08A0 106 010A 107 014A 108 018A 109 025A 110 030A 111 035A 112 044A 113 050A 114 061A 115 078A 116 094A 117 103A 118 144A 119 166A 120 202A 121 225A 122 260A 123 290A 124 430A 125 521A 126 602A 127 693A 128 720A 09 03 Firmware ID Displays the firmware name E g UIFI S 09 04 Firmware ver Displays the version of the firmware package in the drive e g EOOF hex 09 05 Firmware patch Displays the version of the firmware patch in the drive 1 09 10 Int logic ver Displays the version of the logic on the main circuit board of the drive Parameters 109 09 20 Option slot1 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 1 0 No option 1 No comm 2 Unknown 3 FEN 01 4 FEN 11 5 FEN 21 6 FIO 01 7 FIO 11 8 FPBA 01 9 FPBA 02 10 FCAN 01 11 FDNA 01 12 FENA 01 13 FENA 02 14 FLON 01 15
99. 8 Parameters 91 31 Endat max calc Selects the maximum encoder calculation time for EnDat encoder Note This parameter needs to be set only when an EnDat encoder is used in continuous mode i e without incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 EnDat encoder is selected by setting parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf to EnDat 7 os i 92 Resolver conf Eo polepars Secs he namber pole pare 5202 Exe signa amp Deimos he ampllude aa O 225 Ee signal teq Defines he fequeney ofthe erteten soa 1 20 kHz Frequency of excitation signal Selects the speed calculation mode for encoder 1 A amp B all Channels A and B Rising and falling edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Notes When single track mode has been selected by parameter 93 02 Enc1 type this setting acts like the setting A all When single track mode has been selected by parameter 93 02 Enc1 type the speed is always positive A all Channel A Rising and falling edges are used for speed 1 calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Note When single track mode has been selected by parameter 93 02 Enc1 type the speed is always positive 3 A rising Channel A Rising edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Note When single track mode has been selected by parameter 93 02 Enc1 type the speed is
100. 80 l 89 m BS io S 80les O 00 O NI O xil ojl xil ol a gt bii gt gt gt oj M 192 Parameters 2 parameter 35 02 Signal1 max 32768 32768 Maximum value for process variable 1 97 1 1 1 1 35 07 Proc var1 min Minimum value for process variable 1 See diagram at parameter 35 02 Signal1 max 32768 32768 Minimum value for process variable 1 Met 35 08 Signal2 param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 07 Process var2 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 1073742082 01 04 Motor current see page 94 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 35 09 Signal2 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35 13 Proc var2 max 04 07 Process var2 35 10 35 09 Signal selected by 35 08 Signal2 param 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process 1 variable 2 value Parameters 193 35 10 Signal2 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 14 Proc var2 min See diagram at parameter 35 09 Signal2 max 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process variable 1 1 2 value 35 11 Proc var2 Scaling for process variabl
101. 94 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 186 Parameters 33 11 Superv3 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 3 See parameter 33 09 Superv3 func 32768 00 Upper limit for supervision 3 32768 00 33 12 Superv3 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 3 See parameter 33 09 Superv3 func 32768 00 Lower limit for supervision 3 32768 00 34 01 Overload func Configures the supervision of the upper boundary of the user load curve 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Supervision enabled Input value sel Input value selection 0 Current Current is supervised 1 Torque Torque is supervised Ena warn Enable warning 0 7 Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates an alarm when the curve is exceeded 1 Enabled Drive trips on a fault when the curve is exceeded Ena lim integ Enable limit integration 0z 1 Enabled Integration time defined by parameter 34 18 Load integ time is used After the supervision is evoked the current or torque is limited by the upper boundary of the load curve Ena lim always Enable limit always 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The current or torque is always limited by the upper boundary of the load curve Parameters 187 34 02 Underload func Configures the supervision of the lower boundary of the user load curve 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Su
102. ACS850 Firmware Manual ACS850 Standard Control Program ACS850 drive manuals DRIVE HARDWARE MANUAL ACS850 04 Drive Modules 1 1 to 45 kW Hardware Manual 3AUA0000045496 English ACS850 04 Drive Modules 55 to 160 kW 75 to 200 hp Hardware Manual 3AUA0000045487 English ACS850 04 Drive Modules 200 to 500 kW 250 to 600 hp Hardware Manual 3AUA0000026234 English DRIVE FIRMWARE MANUALS ACS850 Standard Control Program Firmware Manual 3AUA0000045497 English OPTION MANUALS FIO 01 Digital 1 O Extension User s Manual 3AFE68784921 English FIO 11 Analog I O Extension User s Manual 3AFE68784930 English FIO 21 Analog I O Extension User s Manual 3AUA0000031061 English FEN 01 TTL Encoder Interface User s Manual 3AFE68784603 English FEN 11 Absolute Encoder Interface User s Manual 3AFE68784841 English FEN 21 Resolver Interface User s Manual 3AFE68784859 English FEN 31 HTL Encoder Interface User s Manual 3AUA0000031044 English The delivery includes a multilingual quick installation guide The delivery includes a multilingual quick start up guide Firmware Manual ACS850 Standard Control Program XN GN 3AUA0000045497 Rev C EN EFFECTIVE 2009 07 20 2009 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved Table of contents 5 Table of contents ACS850 drive manuals 2 1 About the manual What this chapter contains 3433 x ACE EE REOR o REC COEUR ROC Re
103. ARM Drive module temperature is Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 0x4290 excessive 40 C 104 F ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary MENU CHG Loading a parameter listing Enter password at parameter 16 03 Pass PASSWORD REQ requires a password code Ox6F81 2054 MENU CHANGED A different parameter listing is Informative alarm Ox6F82 being loaded 2055 1 DEVICE CLEAN Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5080 2056 COOLING FAN Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5081 2057 ADD COOLING Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5082 2058 CABINET FAN Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5083 2059 CAPACITOR Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x5084 2060 MOTOR BEARING Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x738C 2061 MAIN CONTACTOR Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x548D 2062 1 RELAY OUTPUT SW Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x548E 2063 MOTOR START Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance COUNT 0x6180 2064 POWER UP COUNT Maintenance alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance 0x6181 2065
104. Alarm word 2ms 5 08 Alarm word Zms 09 System info 9 01 Drive type 9 02 Drive rating TD 9 03 Firmware ID 9 04 Firmware ver 9 05 Firmware patch 9 10 Int logic ver 9 20 Option slot1 9 21 Option slot2 n 272 S 35 Additional parameter data 243 Parameter groups 10 99 Data Default 10 Start stop 10 Startstop ss 1001 emm os o D m pomjee sam C 1 t T T CICE st n r s ras Hans z sar emm s 1 1005 52 saint st n r sz T urus 006 z sanin Rane S T rs vor Host s n 82 1 Hans g tan mtemer 32 T 10 10 Bit pointer 32 DI3 10 11 Bit pointer 32 C TRUE 10 15 Bit pointer 32 C TRUE 10 17 Bit pointer 32 C TRUE 0 19 enum 16 Disabled 10 20 enum 16 Off2 stop 11 Start stop mode 11 01 Start mode enum 11 02 Dc magn time UINT32 11 03 enum 11 04 Dc hold speed REAL 11 05 Dc hold curr ref UINT32 11 06 Dc hold enum 11 07 Autophasing mode enum Operating mode Ext1 Ext2 sel Bit pointer 2 03 Ext1 ctrl mode enum 1 2 05 Ext2 ctrl mode enum 3 Analogue inputs 01 filt time REAL 1 1 16 16 0 10000 2 0 1000 0 100 1 500 ms Coast 16 16 5 0 rpm 3096 Disabled Turning S m 0 o x ot E is 16 EN pom Ry pom E 20 297 Automatic NL 5 Nol N 8 m C FALSE 5 MEN Speed 5 Speed
105. EOF UFF file structure failure Delete faulty file or contact your local 0x6300 ABB representative 0314 Incompatible firmware Contact your local ABB representative INTERFACE interface Note This fault cannot be reset 0315 RESTORE FILE Restoration of backed up Contact your local ABB representative 0x630D parameters failed 0316 DAPS MISMATCH Mismatch between JCU Contact your local ABB representative 0x5484 Control Unit firmware and power unit logic versions 0317 SOLUTION FAULT Fault generated by function Check the usage of the 0x6200 block SOLUTION FAULT in SOLUTION FAULT block in the solution the solution program program MENU HIDING Menu hiding file missing or Reload application 0x6200 corrupted Contact your local ABB representative Fieldbus control 277 Fieldbus control What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network fieldbus 278 Fieldbus control System overview The drive can be connected to a fieldbus controller via a fieldbus adapter module The adapter module is installed into drive Slot 3 ACS850 Fieldbus controller o o e o 5 D E ON ABB Fieldbus 7 CAS ews _ tee m r h devices Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter in Slot 3 Data Flovv 8 C
106. FBA CW Bit 13 0 FBA CW LA D RFG OUTPUT ENABLED B 21 CW Bit 14 0 CW L RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED iC c FBA CW OPERATING D 21 from any state FBA CW Bit 0 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXX 00 1xxx 1xxx 10 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXX x000 1xxx 1xxx 10 FBA Communication Profile FBA CW Bits 7 1 FBA CW Fieldbus Control Word FBA SW Fieldbus Status Word n Speed Input Current RFG Ramp Function Generator f Frequency FBA CW Bit 7 0 FBA CW Bit 16 1 from any state OFF1 EBA CW Bit 4 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 OFF 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 FBA SW Bit 6 1 FBA SW Bit 0 1 from any state Emergency OFF OFF2 FBA CW Bit 2 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 FBA SW Bit 4 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXX xxxx 1xxx 1xxx xx10 FBA SW Bit 3 1 xXXX XXXX XXXX XXX 0 1 1xxx xx10 from any state Emergency stop OFF3 FBA CW Bit 3 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 OFF3 ACTIVE FBA SW Bit 5 1 n f 0 1 0 A FBA SW Bit 8 1 286 Fieldbus control Control block diagrams 287 Control block diagrams What this chapter contains The chapter contains a graphical representation of the control program 288 Control block diagrams Bau joe peeds 0 14 090 HUI AOQV z YA 090 jurodjes 1v 114 60 90 p ds oJez 4q 0 90 wdi p ds JOJOIN LO LO yu p ds e oqy 8016
107. FE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Parameters 235 Standstill Autophasing Reduced ID Run This mode should be selected instead of the Normal ID Run if mechanical losses are higher than 20 i e the motor cannot be de coupled from the driven equipment or if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running i e in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals With Reduced ID run the control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as with the Normal ID run Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run lt 90 seconds Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Standstill ID run The motor is injected with DC current With an asynchronous motor the motor shaft is not rotating with permanent magnet motor the shaft can rotate 0 5 revolution Note This mode should be selected only if the Normal or Reduced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics e g with lift or crane applications During autophasing the start angle of the motor is determined Note that other motor model values are not updated Se
108. I status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 9 26 04 Const speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 0 Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 3 When bit 0 of parameter 26 07 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 26 02 Const speed sel1 and 26 03 Const speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 26 02 Const speed sel1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Dw Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 07 DI status bit 5 1074070017 E 77 7 26 06 Const speed1 Defines constant speed 1 30000 30000 Constant speed 1 1 1rpm 26 07 Const speed2 Defines constant speed 2 30000 30000 Constant speed 2 1 1 rpm 26 08 Const speed3 Defines constant speed 3 30000 30000 Constant speed 3 rpm Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 170 Parameters 26 09 Const speed4 Defines constant speed
109. IGN 24V DIOGND DI DIO grounding selection jumpers Digital input DI1 Stop Start Digital input DI2 Direction 0 9 9 al hp 9 N D Digital input DI3 Speed Torque control selection Digital input DI4 Constant speed 1 4 Digital input DI5 Acc Dec ramp 1 2 selection Digital input DI6 or thermistor input Start interlock 0 Stop DIIL Digital input output DIO1 Output Ready DIO1 Digital input output DIO2 Output Running DIO2 Reference voltage VREF ME Reference voltage VREF UE Analog input EXT1 Reference Speed ref1 S m Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Naz Analog input AI2 EXT2 Reference Torq ref1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper AI2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper AO1 Analog output AO1 Current g output AO1 Current My REE x AO2 3 ES IN1 t m a Analog output AO2 Speed Drive to drive link XD2D Safe Torque Off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start XSTO Control panel connection Memory unit connection 90 Application macros Sequential control macro The Sequential control macro is suited for speed control applications in which speed reference multiple constant speeds and two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used The macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by dig
110. KUP Restarting drive The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of LOC U PAR BACKUP completion Restoring downloading all parameters Downloading continues LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive Downloading finishes LOCU PAR BACKUP Finishing restore operation The panel shows a list of erroneous parameters VALUE MISSING JESE INT SCALE READY 00 00 EDIT You can scroll the parameters with keys A and LOC PAR ERRORS 4 2 The reason for parameter error is also shown 22114 1313 AI SUPERVIS ACT 000 bin INCORRECT VALUE TYPE READY 00 00 EDIT 42 The ACS850 control panel EDIT You can edit parameters by pressing Nl when EDIT command is visible Parameter 60 05 Pos unit is used as an example Edit the parameter as shown in section Parameters on page 23 SAVE V W value Press to save the new value CANCEL Press EZ to return to the list of erroneous parameters The parameter value you chose is visible under the parameter name Press when you have finished editing the parameters LOC UY PAR EDIT 6005 POS UNIT Revolution 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT 6005 POS UNIT Degree 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC B PAR ERRORS 1 005 POS Zi Marius MISSING 0006 P INT SCALE T Poo 00 EDIT Trying to restore a user set between different firmware versions If you try to backup and restore a user set between different firmware versions th
111. Locked Locked Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code into parameter 16 03 Pass code The lock is open Parameter values can be changed Not saved The lock is open Parameter values can be changed but the 2 changes will not be stored at power switch off 16 03 Pass code Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 16 02 Parameter lock After entering 358 at this parameter parameter 16 02 Parameter lock can be adjusted The value reverts back to 0 automatically 0 2147483647 Pass code for parameter lock 1 16 04 Param restore Restores the original settings of the application i e parameter factory default values Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Restore defs All parameter values are restored to default values except motor data ID run results and fieldbus drive to drive link and encoder configuration data Clear all All parameter values are restored to default values including 2 motor data ID run results and fieldbus and encoder configuration data PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring Drive CPU is re booted after the restoring is completed 146 Parameters 16 07 Param save Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection
112. O 9poui unr pI 66 ENOA anuno J N LL 8 isv4 Buiseydomy 7 07 LL ZHUOA SAINI Y N OL SE olny LHOA Y N 60 8 gbey anno 4 N 80 86 anno 4 N 20786 uano JOJON YO LO ebay anno 4 N 90 86 2602 zai anno A N 8086 SEYN bay anno 4 9 v0 9 ounj eAuno 4 N 0 8E euin uBeW 5ad zo LL pouu HE LO LL JUALIN JOJO A S0 LO o3uoo hes 491 xn 3 10 8 uonesiuundo pei Supye q An z n Buluayeom 2195891 B NOA yO 0 undo A s uz J 043u02 12910 294 Control block diagrams Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection
113. OC tj MAIN MENU Output mode Othervvise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER The ACS850 control panel 39 Go to the Parameter Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys A and S Ww 7 and BACKUP TO raag 1 pressing Sl SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL To copy all parameters including user sets and internal LOC PAR BACKUP parameters from the drive to the control panel select C i fil 1 2 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL on the Par Backup with keys lt OPY1N9 T17e Ca a nd LR and press Operation starts Press EZ if you vvant to stop the operation ABORT 00 00 After the backup is completed the display shovvs a LOC U MESSAGE message about the completion Press x to return to Parameter up oad the Par Backup successful OK 00 00 To perform restore functions select the appropriate operation here RESTORE PARS ALL is used as an MALE BACKUP 10 PANEL E example on the Par Backup with keys A and SHOW BACKUP INFO DARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL Press x Restoring starts LOC vU EAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 Backup interface version is checked Scroll the text with LOC R VERSION CHECK 1 keys A and Cw BACKUP n M VER 0 2 OK MWARE VERSION CANCER 00 00 CONT
114. RR TR RTT Rr d E da e d 74 Speed controller tuning n 74 Thermal motor protection 343 Ras baba xod dlb EC E Rw Re R AA ii 76 Thermal motor protection model 76 Temperature measurement o 76 sco rr A a A 77 TIMES Tc 77 User definable load curve eee eens 79 User definable U f GUYS 79 Table of contents 7 5 Application macros What this chapter contains au adc ca a ACER a RAD AAA a CEG ERE ORY CR ORC we 81 General 5250000050 3600 na R dead dre md da 81 ccr 82 Default control connections for the Factory macro 83 Hand Auto Macro Apiesa ese Eph PARA a b d b bd a deut d d dl 84 Default control connections for the Hand Auto macro 85 PID control macro 86 Default control connections for the PID control macro 87 Torque control macro 88 Default control connections for the Torque control macro 89 Sequential control macro 90 Default control connections for the Sequential control macro 92 6 Parameters What this chapter contains bee babes 93 Terms and abbreviations rr 93 Parameter listin
115. SE or 1 TRUE 21 21 22 Co Co Co uii m EN Eam br m m How to select the monitored signals Parameters PARAMETERS 2 How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters CHANGED PAR 32 How to view faults Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 4 How to show hide the clock change date and time TIME amp DATE formats set the clock and enable disable automatic changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 38 panel How to view backup information Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 44 How to edit and change parameter settings related to 11 O Settings O SETTINGS I O terminals How to view drive info Drive Info DRIVE INFO 49 How to view and edit recently changed parameters Parameter Change CHG LOG Log How to do guided tasks specification of related Assistants ASSISTANTS parameter sets with assistants How to reset faults and alarms Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 3 clock transitions according to the daylight saving How to restore parameters from the control panel to Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP the drive How to edit reference value Reference Edit REF EDIT Main menu options actually shown in the control panel o o go S c 2 o The ACS850 control panel 19 B Help and panel version Any mode How to get help Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the dis
116. Torque Off function is active i e safety circuit signal s connected to connector X6 is lost during start or run or while drive is stopped and parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic is set to Fault Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference Mechanical brake fault Fault is activated if required motor starting torque 42 08 Brake open torq is not achieved Mechanical brake control fault Activated e g if brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake closing Mechanical brake control fault Activated e g if brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake opening Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Communication between drive and option module FEN xx and or FIO xx is lost Check external devices for faults Check parameter 30 01 External fault setting Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual Check minimum maximum speed settings parameters 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed Check adequacy of motor braking torque Check applicability of torque control Check need for brake chopper and resistor s Check brake open torque setting parameter 42 08 Check drive torque and current limits
117. ace board between power unit and control unit temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Input bridge or brake chopper temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Drive temperature based on thermal model has exceeded internal alarm limit Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module is lost Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Ananalogue input has reached limit defined by parameter 13 33 AI superv cw The drive does not have a functionality requested by PLC or requested functionality has not been activated Parameters in group 99 have not been set Encoder 1 has been activated by parameter but the encoder interface FEN xx cannot be found Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power Let drive cool down Let drive cool down Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power Check status of fieldbus communication See appropriate User s Manual of fieldbus adapter module Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check cable connections Check if communication master is able to communicate Check PC tool or control panel connection Check control panel connector Replace control pa
118. age supplied to the motor at the nominal operating point This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor Notes With permanent magnet motors the nominal voltage is the BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm e g 60 V per 1000 rpm the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is 3 x 60 V 180 V Note that the nominal voltage is not equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage EDCM specified by some motor manufacturers The nominal voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM voltage by 1 7 or square root of 3 The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 1 6 2 x N Nominal voltage of the motor 1021V 99 08 Mot nom freq Defines the nominal motor frequency Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 5 0 500 0 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor 1021V 99 09 Mot nom speed Defines the nominal motor speed The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 10000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor 99 10 Mot nom power Defines the nominal motor power The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor If multiple motors are
119. ameter 57 11 Ref msg type This parameter is effective only in the master or intermediate followers i e followers relaying the message to other followers Next multicast group in the chain 57 14 Nr ref1 mc grps n the master drive sets the total number of links follovvers or groups of follovvers in the multicast message chain See parameter 57 11 Ref1 msg type Notes This parameter has no effect if the drive is a follower The master counts as a member of the chain if acknowledgement from the last drive to the master is desired Number of links in the multicast chain 57 15 D2D com port Defines the hardvvare to vvhich the drive to drive link is connected In special cases such as harsh operating conditions the galvanic isolation provided by the RS 485 interface of the FSCA module may make for more robust communication than the standard drive to drive connection HT o 64 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings See also section Load analyzer on page 64 64 01 PVL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by parameter 64 02 PVL filt time The peak value is stored along with other pre selected signals at the time into parameters 64 06 64 11 Parameter 64 03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64 13 01 02 Motor
120. ameter setting must be either KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN The FEN xx module can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model which uses the motor thermal time constant parameter 31 14 Mot therm time and the motor load curve parameters 31 10 31 12 User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve if the motor is overheated WARNING The model does not protect the motor if A it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt KTY 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 1 is used for the temperature supervision Note This selection does not apply to FEN 01 KTY 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 2 is used for the temperature supervision Note This selection does not apply to FEN 01 PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1 3 PTC sensors connected to drive thermisto
121. arameter on the control panel CONST is selected in order to fix the value to displayed as C FALSE or 1 C TRUE Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys A and SY 2 and pressing Select the appropriate parameter group with keys A and amp Ww P Here the bit pointer parameter 14 07 DIO2 out src is used as an example Press to select the appropriate parameter group Select th appropriate parameter with keys A and K 9 Current value of each parameter is shown below its name EDIT Press x Select CONST with keys AN and SY 7 LOC t MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC 2 PAR GROUPS 01 01 Actual values 02 I O values 03 Control values 04 Appl values 06 Drive status EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UY PAR GROUPS 14 10 Start stop dir 11 Start stop mode 12 Operating mode 13 Analoque inputs EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC t PARAMETERS 1407 DIO2 out src P 06 02 03 EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC B PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src Pointer CANCEL 00 00 NEXT LOC t PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src Const CANCEL 00 00 NEXT Specify a new constant value TRUE or FALSE for the bit pointer parameter with keys A and Cw SAVE To continue press lo cancel the new value and keep the original press EZ
122. ation 1 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 1 1 44 23 Val cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func Value1 Pre selectable alarm for value counter 1 Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for value counter 1 M 1 210 Parameters 44 24 Val count2 func Configures value counter 2 This counter measures by integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 44 25 Val count2 src When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44 26 Val count2 lim an alarm is given if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter The signal is sampled at 1 second intervals Note that the scaled see the FbEq column at the signal in question value of the signal is used The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04 14 Counter value2 Bit 5 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 lt Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 25 Val count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 94 1073742081 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 44 26 Val count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for
123. ations on page 93 14 04 DIO1 Ton Defines the on activation delay for digital input output DIO1 when 14 02 DIO1 conf is set to Output Drive status DIO1 status 14 04 DIO1 Ton tor 14 05 DIO1 Toff 0 0 3000 0 s On activation delay for DIO1 when set as an output 0 0 14 05 DIO1 Toff Defines the off deactivation delay for digital input output DIO1 when 14 02 DIO1 confis set to Output See parameter 14 04 DIO1 Ton 10 3000 0 5 Off deactivation delay for 1 1 when set as an output igital i 1 14 06 DIO2 conf Selects whether DIO2 is used as a digital output digital input or frequency input DIO2 is used as a digital input Freq input DIO2 is used as a frequency input 2 Output DIO2 is used as a digital output E 128 Parameters LEE C NEN L NN E s when 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Output Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer a 08 DIO2 Ton Defines the on activation delay for digital input output DIO2 when 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Output Drive status DIO2 status 14 08 DIO2 Ton 14 09 DIO2 Toff 0 0 3000 0 s On activation delay for DIO2 when set as an output Parameters 129 14 09 DIO2 Toff Defines the off deactivation delay for digital input output DIO2 when 14 06 DIO2 co
124. bances are detected in communication between encoder interface module and encoder For more information on encoders see parameter groups 90 Enc module sel 92 Resolver conf and 93 Pulse enc conf 0040 ENCODER 2 Encoder 2 feedback fault See fault 0039 0x7381 FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 Programmable fault 50 02 Comm loss func Cyclical communication Check status of fieldbus communication between drive and fieldbus See appropriate User s Manual of adapter module or between fieldbus adapter module PLC and fieldbus adapter Check settings of parameter group 50 module is lost Fieldbus Check cable connections Check if communication master is able to communicate 0046 FBMAPPING FILE Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative 0x6306 MOTOR OVERTEMP 0x4310 Programmable fault 31 01 Mot temp1 prot Al SUPERVISION 0x8110 Programmable fault 13 32 Al superv func Estimated motor temperature Check motor ratings and load based on motor thermal Let motor cool down Ensure proper model has exceeded fault limit motor cooling Check cooling fan clean defined by parameter 31 04 cooling surfaces etc Mot temp1 fitLim Check value of fault limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Measured motor temperature 1 Check that actual number of sensors has exceeded fault limit corresponds to value set by parameter defined by parameter 31 04 31 02 Mot temp src Mot temp1 fitL
125. be activated by setting parameter 92 02 Exc signal ampl or 92 03 Exc signal freq and then setting parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh to Configure Check cable between FEN xx interface and encoder 1 After any modifications in cabling re configure interface by Switching drive power off and on or by activating parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh 264 Fault tracing Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code 2032 ENCODER 2 CABLE 0x738A 2033 020 COMMUNICATION 0x7520 Programmable fault 57 02 Comm loss func 2034 D2D BUFFER OVERLOAD 0x7520 Programmable fault 57 02 Comm loss func 2035 PS COMM 0x5480 2036 RESTORE 0x6300 2037 CUR MEAS CALIBRATION 0x2280 2038 AUTOPHASING 0x3187 2039 EARTH FAULT 0x2330 Programmable fault 30 05 Earth fault 2040 AUTORESET 0x6080 2041 MOTOR NOM VALUE 0x6383 D2D CONFIG 0x7583 Encoder 2 cable fault detected Check cable between FEN xx interface and encoder 2 After any modifications in cabling re configure interface by switching drive power off and on or by activating parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh On the master drive The drive Check that all drives that are polled has not been replied to by an parameters 57 04 Follower mask 1 and activated follower for five 57 05 Follower mask 2 on the drive to consecutive polling cycles drive link are powered properly connected to the link and have the correct node address Chec
126. be reset Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Reload application If fault is still active contact your local ABB representative 276 Fault tracing Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0309 APPL LOADING Corrupted application file Reload application 0x6300 Note This fault cannot be If fault is still active contact your local reset ABB representative 0310 USERSET LOAD Loading of user set is not Reload OxFF69 successfully completed because requested user set does not exist user set is not compatible with drive program drive has been switched off during loading 0311 USERSET SAVE User set is not saved because Check the setting of parameter 95 01 Ctrl OxFF69 of memory corruption boardSupply If the fault still occurs contact your local ABB representative 0312 UFF OVERSIZE UFF file is too big Contact your local ABB representative 0x6300 0313 UFF
127. between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive by using the control panel the drive must be in local control To switch between remote control REM shown on the LOC UY MESSAGE status line and local control LOC shown on the status Swi tchi ng to the line press E local control mode Note Switching to local control can be prevented with parameter 16 01 Local lock 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press E The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 27 If you press the key until the text Keep running appears the drive continues running as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press C gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line stops rotating To start the drive in local control press C The arrow amp or 3 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint The ACS850 control panel 21
128. bit represents follower with node address 1 while the most significant bit represents follower 31 When a bit is set to 1 the corresponding node address is polled For example followers 1 and 2 are polled when this parameter is set to the value of 0x3 0h00000000 Follower mask 1 1 1 Oh7FFFFFFF 57 05 Follower mask 2 On the master drive selects the followers to be polled If no response is received from a polled follower the action selected by parameter 57 02 Comm loss func is taken The least significant bit represents follower with node address 32 while the most significant bit represents follower 62 When a bit is set to 1 the corresponding node address is polled For example followers 32 and 33 are polled when this parameter is set to the value of 0x3 0h00000000 Follower mask 2 1 1 Oh7FFFFFFF 57 06 Ref 1 src Selects the source of D2D reference 1 sent to the followers The parameter is effective on the master drive as well as intermediate followers in a multicast message chain see parameter 57 11 Ref1 msg type Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 93 57 07 Ref 2 src On the master drive selects the source of D2D reference 2 broadcast to all follovvers Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 93 57 08 Follower cw src Selects the source of the D2D control word sent to the followers The parameter is effective on the master drive as well as intermediate follower
129. changed after the motor identification ID run if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive if the drive is used with no motor connected for example for test purposes if the drive runs a medium voltage motor through a step up transformer Scalar Scalar control This mode is suitable in special cases where 1 DTC cannot be applied In scalar control the drive is controlled with a frequency reference The outstanding motor control accuracy of DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode Note Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 of the nominal current of the inverter See also section Scalar motor control on page 74 99 06 Mot nom current Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate If multiple motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of the motors Notes Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 9096 of the nominal current of the drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 0 6400 0 A Nominal current of the motor The allowable range is 1 6 2x 102 1A lon of the drive 0 2 x f n with scalar control mode Parameters 233 99 07 Mot nom voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage as fundamental phase to phase rms volt
130. command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed Limit the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live the inverter modulates motor is magnetised and the drive is ready for a quick restart Zero speed delay can be used e g with the jogging function Speed Speed controller remains active Motor is decelerated to true zero speed 19 06 Zero speed limit 0 30000 ms Zero speed delay 19 08 Above speed lim Defines the supervision limit for the actual speed 0 30000 rpm Actual speed supervision limit 150 Parameters 19 09 Speed TripMargin Defines together with 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed the maximum allowed speed of the motor overspeed protection If actual speed 01 01 Motor speed rpm exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 20 01 or 20 02 by more than the value of this parameter the drive trips on the OVERSPEED fault Example If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm the drive trips at 1720 rpm Speed Speed trip margin Speed trip margin 0 0 10000 0 rpm Overspeed trip margin 10 1 rpm 19 10 Speed window Defines the absolute value for the motor speed window supervision i e the absolute value for the difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference 01 01 Motor speed rpm 03 03 SpeedRef unramp When the motor s
131. connected to the drive enter the total power of the motors The unit is selected by parameter 16 17 Power unit Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 00 10000 00 Nominal power of the motor 100 1 kW kW 99 11 Mot nom cosfii Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model Not applicable to permanent magnet motors Not obligatory if set should match the value on the rating plate of the motor Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 00 1 00 Cosphi of the motor 100 1 99 12 Mot nom torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate motor model Not obligatory Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 2147483 647 Nominal motor torque 1000 1 Nem Nm 234 Parameters 99 13 IDrun mode Selects the type of the motor identification performed at the next start of the drive for Direct Torque Control During the identification the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control After the ID run the drive is stopped Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Once the ID run is activated it can be cancelled by stopping the drive If ID run has already been performed once parameter is automatically set to NO If no ID run has been performed yet parameter is automatically set to Standstill In this case the ID run must be performed Notes
132. cooling See the motor manufacturer s recommendations See parameter 31 10 Mot load curve Zero speed load for the motor load curve 31 12 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31 10 Mot load curve and 31 11 Zero speed load Defines the break point frequency of the load curve i e the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 31 10 Mot load curve towards the value of parameter 31 11 Zero speed load See parameter 31 10 Mot load curve 0 01 500 00 Hz 1 Break point for the motor load curve 100 1 Hz 31 13 Mot nom tempRise Defines the temperature rise of the motor when the motor is loaded with nominal current See the motor manufacturer s recommendations The temperature rise value is used by the motor thermal protection model when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated Temperature Motor nominal temperature rise Ambient temperature 182 Parameters Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal protection model i e time inside which the temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature See the motor manufacturer s recommendations The motor thermal protection model is used when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated 31 14 Mot therm time 100 10000 s Motor load 100 Temperature rise 100 63 32 Automatic reset Defines conditions for automatic fault resets 32 01 Autoreset sel
133. critical speed 2 rpm 25 05 Crit speed2 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2 Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 04 Crit speed2 lo 168 Parameters 1 1 rpm 30000 30000 High limit for critical speed 2 rpm 25 06 Crit speed3 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 07 Crit speed3 hi 30000 30000 Low limit for critical speed 3 rpm 25 07 Crit speed3 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3 Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 06 Crit speea lo 30000 30000 High limit for critical speed 3 rpm 26 Constant speeds Constant speed selection and values An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference See section Constant speeds on page 59 26 01 Const speed func Determines how constant speeds are selected and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed 1 Packed 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 26 02 26 03 and 26 04 respectively In case of conflict the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority tart dir To determine running direction for a constant speed the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 26 06 26 12 is multiplied by the direction signal forward 1 reve
134. ction is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations Note that the frequency converter a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module as defined in IEC 61800 2 is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised WARNING Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake Program features 69 standards Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature such as the brake control function but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations The brake on off is controlled via signal 03 16 Brake command The source for the brake supervision is selected by parameter 42 02 Brake acknowl The brake control hardware and wirings need to be done by the user Brake on off control through selected relay digital output Brake supervision through selected digital input Emergency brake switch in the brake control circuit Brake on off control through relay output i e parameter 14 42 RO7 src setting is P 03 16 00 03 16 Brake command e Brake supervision through digital input DI5 i e parameter 42 02 Brake acknowl setting is P 02 01 04 02 01 DI status bit 4 Brake control 1 1 JCU unit hardware x2 230 VAC dv Emergency brake R L 70 Program features Process PID control There is a built in PID controller in the drive The co
135. dbus code 0203 T4 OVERLOAD Firmware time level 4 overload Contact your local ABB representative 0x6100 T5 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A1 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A2 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A1 INIT FAULT 0x6100 A2 INIT FAULT 0x6100 STACK ERROR 0x6100 FPGA ERROR OxFF61 UFF FILE READ 0x6300 APPL DIR CREATION 0x6100 FPGA CONFIG DIR 0x6100 PU RATING ID 0x5483 RATING DATABASE 0x6100 LICENSING 0x6100 DEFAULT FILE 0x6100 APPLFILE PAR 0x6300 Note This fault cannot be reset Firmware time level 5 overload Note This fault cannot be reset Application time level 1 fault Note This fault cannot be reset Application time level 2 fault Note This fault cannot be reset Application task creation fault Note This fault cannot be reset Application task creation fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset File read error Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Corrupted application file Note This fault cannot
136. desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 10 01 Ext1 start func 3 FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location 10 04 Ext2 start func 3 FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when 2 is selected as the active control location 21 01 Speed ref1 3 FBA ref1 Fieldbus reference REF 1 or REF2 is used sel 4 FBA ref2 as speed reference 1 21 02 Speed ref2 3 FBA ref1 Fieldbus reference REF 1 or REF2 is used sel 4 FBA ref2 as speed reference 2 24 01 Torq ref1 sel 3 FBA ref1 Fieldbus reference REF 1 or REF2 is used 4 FBA ref2 as torque reference 1 24 02 Torq ref add 3 FBA ref1 Fieldbus reference REF 1 or REF2 is used sel 4 FBA ref2 as torque reference addition SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 16 07 Param save 0 Done Saves parameter value changes including 1 Save those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 282 Fieldbus control The fieldbus control interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 32 bit input and output data words The drive supports at the maximum the use of 12 data words 16 bits in each direction Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controlle
137. e panel shows you the following alarm information Restore operation starts normally Version check is also OK You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are not the same You can scroll the text with keys A and amp Ww 7 LOC t PAR BACKUP Initializi ng param restore ope ration 00 00 LOC VER CHECK FIRMWARE VERSION UIFI 1100 UMFI 1010 OK PRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL 00 00 CONT LOC VER CHECK FIRMWARE VERSION PRODUCT 3 OK CANCEL 00 00 CONT The ACS850 control panel 43 If the downloading is continued the display shows a LOCI PAR BACKUP message about it Initializing param restore operation 00 00 Downloading continues drive is being restarted LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of LOC U PAR BACKUP completion Restoring downloading user set 1 Downloading continues LOCU PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 Downloading continues drive is being restarted LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive Downloading finishes LOCU PAR BACKUP Finishing restore Operation O Panel shows a text identifying the alarm and returns to LOC U ALARM the Par Backup ALARM 2036 RESTORE EXIT 44 The ACS850 control panel Trying to load a user set between different firmware versions If you try load a user set between different firmware versions the panel shows you the following
138. e Error value Note This parameter is automatically set by the speed controller autotune function See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode Integration time for speed controller 160 Parameters 23 03 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output 257 Ts Kp xe Error value K xe e Error value T Time Gain 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 250 us Ae Error value change between two samples Note Changing this parameter value is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used 0 000 10 000 s Derivation time for speed controller 1000 1s 23 04 Deriv filt time Defines the derivation filter time constant See parameter 23 03 Derivation time 0 0 1000 0 ms Derivation filter time constant Parameters 161 23 05 Acc comp DerTime Defines the derivati
139. e selectable by jumper Al1 Al1 d E Ground XAI Analog input AI2 EXT2 Reference Speed ref2 Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper AO1 Analog output AO1 Current g output AO1 Current My REE x AO2 3 ES IN1 t m a Analog output AO2 Speed Drive to drive link XD2D Safe Torque Off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start XSTO Control panel connection Memory unit connection 86 Application macros PID control macro The PID control macro is suitable for process control applications for example closed loop pressure level or flow control systems such as pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems level controlling pumps of water reservoirs pressure boost pumps of district heating systems e material flow control on a conveyor line The process reference signal is connected to analog input and the process feedback signal to AI2 Alternatively a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through Al1 Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the process variable Selection between direct speed control control location EXT 1 and process variable control EXT2 is done through digital input DI3 The stop start signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to DI1 and DI6 respectively A constant speed 30
140. e 2 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus I mn 10 lt 100 1 1000 1 10000 1 100000 1 35 12 Proc var2 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04 07 Process var2 process variable 2 0 98 35 13 Proc var2 max See parameter 35 05 Proc var1 unit Maximum value for process variable 2 See diagram at parameter 35 09 Signal2 max 32768 32768 35 14 Proc var2 min Maximum value for process variable 2 Minimum value for process variable 2 See diagram at parameter 35 09 Signal2 max 32768 32768 35 15 Signal3 param Minimum value for process variable 2 Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 08 Process var3 1073742081 1073742082 1073742083 01 04 Motor current see page 94 1073742084 Current 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 01 06 Motor torque see page 94 1073742086 Dc voltage 01 07 Dc voltage see page 94 1073742087 Povver inu 01 22 Power inu out see page 94 1073742102 Povver motor 01 23 Motor povver see page 94 1073742103 SpRef unramp 03 03 SpeedRef unramp see page 101 1073742595 1073742597 1073742598 1073742606 1073742851 1073742853 Speed rpm Speed 96 Frequency 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 94 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 01 03 Output frequency see page 94 Current Torque SpRef ramped SpRef used TorqRef used 03 05 SpeedRef ramped see page 101 03 06 SpeedRef used see page 101 03 1
141. e PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys A and 7 and pressing Digital I Digita inputs Relay outputs EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the I O group e g Digital inputs with keys A LOC amp I O SETTINGS 4 and S v 7 Analog outputs Analog inputs Digital I Os Relay outputs EXIT 00 00 SEL Press After a brief pause the display shows the LOC amp I O SETTINGS l1 current settings for the selection You can scroll digital inputs and parameters with keys Extl start 1n CA and S v 7 1010 Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 INFO Press A The panel shows information related to I O LOC t I O INFO ed select in this case DI1 NUM OF I O ITEMS You can scroll information with keys A and SY 7 0 Press EZ to return to the digital inputs SLOT NUMBER 0 NODE NUMBER EXIT 00 00 The ACS850 control panel 47 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys A and SY 2 You can edit the parameter ses v 1 0 SETTINGS 1 INFO selection turns into EDIT selection 1002 Extl start inl DI2 DI3 1010 Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl DI1 P 02 01 00 CANCEL 00 00 SEL Specify a new value for the setting with keys A and LOC UPAR EDIT R Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 1002 Extl start inl value Holding the key down chan
142. e TTL output FEN 21 TTL Module type FEN 21 Resolver Interface Echo TTL encoder 4 input X51 pulses are echoed to the TTL output FEN 31 HTL Module type FEN 31 HTL Encoder Interface Echo HTL 5 encoder input X82 pulses are echoed to the TTL output 90 05 Enc cable fault Selects the action in case an encoder cable fault is detected by the FEN xx encoder interface Cable fault detection inactive The drive trips on an ENCODER 1 2 CABLE fault Warning The drive generates an ENCODER 1 2 CABLE warning This 2 is the recommended setting if the maximum pulse frequency of sine cosine incremental signals exceeds 100 kHz at high frequencies the signals may attenuate enough to invoke the function The maximum pulse frequency can be calculated as follows Max pulse frequency Pulses per rev ae speed in rpm 90 10 Enc par refresh Setting this parameter to 1 forces a reconfiguration of the FEN xx interfaces which is needed for any parameter changes in groups 90 93 to take effect Note The parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Done Reconfiguration done Reconfigure The value will automatically revert to Done 91 Absol enc conf Absolute encoder configuration See also section Encoder support on page 62 revolution Note This parameter does not need to be set when EnDat or SSI encoders are used in continuous mode See parameter 91 25 SSI mode 1 91 30 Endat mode 91 03 Rev count bits Defines the number of b
143. e also parameter 11 07 Autophasing mode Notes Autophasing can only be selected after the Normal Reduced Standstill ID run has been performed once Autophasing is used when an absolute encoder has been added changed to a permanent magnet motor and there is no need to perform the Normal Reduced Standstill ID run again During Autophasing the motor shaft must NOT be locked and the load torque must be 5 Cur meas cal Current offset and gain measurement calibration The 5 calibration will be performed at next start 236 Parameters Additional parameter data 237 Additional parameter data What this chapter contains This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data For parameter descriptions see chapter Parameters on page 93 Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting is possible Bit pointer Bit pointer A bit pointer can point to a single bit in the value of another parameter or be fixed to 0 C FALSE or 1 C TRUE Enumerated list i e selection list FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication INT32 32 bit integer value 31 bits sign pp Packed boolean REAL 16 bit value 16 bit value 31 bits sign AY integer value fractional value REAL24 8 bit value 24 bit value 31 bits sign Karl AA integer value fractional
144. e diagram T TTL 285 10 Control block diagrams What this chapter contains e 287 en c n ftdt p EI 288 Speed reference modification and ramping 289 Speed error handling eet 290 Torque reference modification operating mode selection 291 Process a d iik rede LER oo 7 7 ee 77 292 Direct torque control e nn 293 Further information Product and service inquiries 9 0 Prod ct training ce 2 5 90 R Z A ER 9 9 7 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Document library on the Internet eee Mi 10 Table of contents About the manual 11 About the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes the contents of the manual It also contains information on the compatibility safety and intended audience Compatibility The manual is compatible with ACS850 standard control program Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive Read the complete safety instructions before you install commission or use the drive The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual e Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function For
145. e indicates that motor identification is completed This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Select how motor identification should be performed parameter 99 13 mode Start identification routines by pressing Start key Check that it is safe to continue operation Return emergency stop push button to normal position or adjust the fieldbus Control Word accordingly Restart drive Stop drive Let resistor cool down Check resistor overload protection function settings parameters 48 01 48 05 Check alarm limit setting parameter 48 07 Br temp alarmlim Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Let chopper cool down Check resistor overload protection function settings parameters 48 01 48 05 Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive 262 Fault tracing Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 DEVICE OVERTEMP INTBOARD OVERTEMP 0x7182 BC MOD OVERTEMP 0x7183 IGBT OVERTEMP 0x7184 FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 Programmable fault 50 02 Comm loss func LOCAL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 Programmable fault 30 03 Local ctrl loss Al SUPERVISION 0x8110 Programmable fault 13 32 Al superv func FB PAR CONF 0x6320 NO MOTOR DATA 0x6381 ENCODER 1 FAILURE 0x7301 Measured drive temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Interf
146. e motor 121kWh connection See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 211 01 36 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct on line motor 1 connection This value is a multiplication of parameters 07 35 Saved energy and 45 02 Energy tariff1 See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 211 01 37 Saved CC2 Reduction in CO emissions in metric tons compared to 1 1 metric direct on line motor connection This value is calculated by ton multiplying saved energy in megawatt hours by 0 5 metric tons MWh See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 211 02 I O values Input and output signals 1 02 01 DI status Status of digital inputs DI8 DI1 The 7th digit reflects the start interlock input DIIL Example 01000001 DI1 and DIIL are on DI2 DI6 and DI8 are off 02 02 RO status Status of relay outputs RO7 RO1 Example 0000001 RO1 is energized RO2 RO7 are de energized 02 03 DIO status Status of digital input outputs DIO10 DIO1 Example 0000001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off 02 04 Al1 Value of analogue input in V or mA Input type is selected 1000 1 unit with jumper J1 on the JCU Control Unit 02 05 scaled Scaled value of analogue input Al1 See parameters 13 04 1000 7 1 unit max scale and 13 05 Al1 min scale 02 06 Al2 Value of analogue input Al2 in V or mA Input type is selected 1000 1 unit with jumper 42 on the JCU Control Unit 02 07 AI2 scaled Scaled value
147. e nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive e lf the drive is used without a motor connected for example for test purposes fthe drive runs a medium voltage motor through a step up transformer In scalar control some standard features are not available E IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is scalar When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require a high break away torque Motor Voltage IR Compensation In Direct Torque Control DTC no IR 7 No compensation compensation is possible or needed Signal supervision Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function Whenever the signal exceeds or falls below a predefined limit a bit of 06 13 Superv status is activated Absolute values can be used Settings Parameter group 33 Supervision page 183 Speed controller tuning The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted using the autotune function parameter 23 20 PI tune mode Autotuning is based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine It is however also possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time Program features 75 The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1
148. e original press 9906 Mot nom current C 3 5 A 9907 Mot nom voltage 7 Mot nom req Mot nom speg EXIT 00 00 EDIT How to change the value of value pointer parameters In addition to the parameters shown above there are two kinds of pointer parameters value pointer parameters and bit pointer parameters A value pointer parameter points to the value of another parameter C L 0 menu by pressing x if you are in the LOC u MAIN MENU 1 Otherwise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS LOC PAR GROUPS 01 on the menu with keys As and SY 7 and pressing values ENTER EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys CAN LOC PAR GROUPS 21 and 2 Here the value pointer parameter 21 01 15 No ogue outputs Speed ref1 sel is used as an example 16 System 19 signal conditions 20 Limits 21 Speed EXIT 00 00 SEL Press to select the appropriate parameter group Select the appropriate parameter with keys A and K 9 7 current value of each parameter is shown below it EDIT Press Current value of the value pointer parameter is shown as well as the parameter it points to Specify a new value with keys A and SY P The parameter the value pointer parameter points to changes respectively Press lt to accept any of the preselected values and to retu
149. e showing the fault or alarm You can reset the fault in the Output or Fault mode The operation in these modes and options is described in this chapter Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you LOC t can start stop change the direction switch between 49 10 local and remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values To do other 7 o tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate option on the menu The status line see DIR 00 00 MENU section Status line on page 11 shows the name of LOC Y MAIN MENU 1 the current menu mode item or state PARAM ETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 18 The ACS850 control panel B List of tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them abbreviations of the options in the Main menu and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Main menu Abbreviations of option the Main menu options How to get help Any How to find out the panel version Any How to start and stop the drive How to switch between local and remote control Any 11 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any DEN reference in the Output mode How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to Parameters PARAMETERS point to the value of a bit in another signal How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to Parameters PARAMETERS fixed 0 FAL
150. each function the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user adjustable parameters Reader The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices electronic components and electrical schematic symbols 12 About the manual Contents The manual consists of the following chapters The ACS850 control panel provides a description and instructions for use of the control panel Control locations and operating modes describes the control locations and operation modes of the drive Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACS850 standard control program Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram Parameters describes the parameters of the drive Additional parameter data contains further information on the parameters Fault tracing lists the alarm warning and fault messages with possible causes and remedies Fieldbus control describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network Control block diagrams contains a graphical representation of the control program Related manuals The delivery of the drive includes a multilingual Quick Start up Guide A complete list of related manuals is printed on the inside of the front cover The ACS850 control panel 13 The ACS850 control panel What this chapter contains This chapter describes the features and operati
151. eal signal value corresponding to maximum AO3 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 18 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 13 AO3 src that corresponds to the minimum AO3 output value defined by parameter 15 16 AO3 out min See parameter 15 17 AO3 src max 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO3 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 19 AO4 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analogue output 4 01 02 Motor speed 96 see page 94 Current 01 05 Motor current see page 94 144 Parameters SpRef used 03 06 SpeedRef used see page 101 1073742598 TorqRef used 03 14 Torq ref used see page 107 1073742606 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 04 03 Process act see page 102 1073742851 q Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 93 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 15 15 21 4 out max Defines the maximum output value for analogue output AO4 41 0 000 22 700 mA Maximum AO4 output value 1000 1 mA 15 20 AOA filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO4 See parameter 15 02 AOT filt time SpRef ramped 03 05 SpeedRef ramped see page 107 1073742597 15 22 4 out min Defines the minimum output value for analogue output AO4 PA 0 000 22 700 mA Minimum AO4 output value 1000 1 mA 15 23 AOA src max Defines the real value of
152. ected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 42 12 Brake fault func Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 5 7 DI6 as indicated 7 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 Bit m setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 function energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the brake specified by the brake manufacturer Brake open delay 100 15 Defines the brake close delay The delay counter starts when the motor actual speed has fallen below the set level parameter 42 05 Close speed after the drive has received the stop command Simultaneously with the counter start the brake control function de energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts closing During the delay the brake function keeps the motor live preventing the motor speed from falling below zero Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical Defines the brake open delay the delay between the internal open brake command and the release of the motor speed control The delay counter starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to the level required at the brake release parameter 42 08 Brake open torq Simultaneously with the counter start
153. ed reference 1 Mul The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 Max The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed 4 reference 1 The greater of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 21 04 Speed ref1 2 sel Configures the selection between speed references 1 and 2 The sources for the references are defined by parameters 21 01 Speed ref1 sel and 21 02 Speed ref2 sel respectively 0 Speed reference 1 1 Speed reference 2 55757 98 1 2 3 5 The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 154 Parameters Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 21 05 Speed share Defines the scaling factor for speed reference 1 2 speed m reference 1 or 2 is multiplied by the defined value Speed reference 1 or 2 is selected by parameter 21 04 Speed ref1 2 sel 8 000 8 000 Speed reference scaling factor 1000 1 21 07 Speed ref jog1 Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1 For more information on jogging see page 63 30000 30000 Speed reference for jogging function 1 1 1 rpm rpm 21 08 Speed ref jog2 Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2 For more information on jogging see page 63 30000 30000 Spe
154. ed reference for jogging function 2 rpm 21 09 SpeedRef min abs Defines the absolute minimum limit for the speed reference Limited speed reference 20 01 Maximum speed 21 09 SpeedRef min abs 21 09 Speed reference SpeedRef min abs 20 02 Minimum speed 0 30000 rpm Absolute minimum limit for speed reference 21 10 Mot pot func Selects whether the value of the motor potentiometer is retained upon drive power off Drive power off resets the value of the motor potentiometer Store The value of the motor potentiometer is retained over drive 1 power off 21 11 Mot pot up Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 DI DI Parameters 155 IN SP Wot pot down Slds the source of motor poientometer down sorar pita a indicated by 0207 DI sana S 1074070077 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 22 Speed ref ramp Speed reference ramp settings 5 22 01 Acc Dec sel Selects the source that svvitches betvveen the tvvo sets of acceleration deceleration times defined by parameters 22 02 22 08 0 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force 1 Acceleratio
155. eference 23 14 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load 7 torque reference speed controller output At 10096 speed controller output drooping is at its nominal level i e equal to the value of this parameter The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load Droop rate can be used e g to adjust the load sharing in a Master Follower application run by several drives In a Master Follower application the motor shafts are coupled to each other The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice Speed decrease Speed controller output x Drooping x Max speed Example Speed controller output is 5096 droop rate is 196 maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm Speed decrease 0 50 x 0 01 x 1500 rpm 7 5 rpm Motor speed in 26 of nominal No drooping 23 14 Drooping rate Drooping Speed controller Drive load output 96 164 Parameters 23 15 PI adapt max sp Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation Speed controller gain and integration time can be adapted according to actual speed This is done by multiplying the gain 23 01 Proport gain and integration time 23 02 Integration time by coefficients at certain speeds The coeff
156. elected by parameter 56 03 Signal3 param is displayed on the optional control panel Disabled Signal not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled are shown together with their respective signal name Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit 2 Shovvs the signal as a horizontal bar Drive name Shovvs the drive name The drive name can be set using the DriveStudio PC tool Drive type Shovvs the drive type 57 D2D Configuration of drive to drive communication See also communication section Drive to drive link on page 61 57 01 Link mode Activates the drive to drive connection Disabled Drive to drive connection disabled The drive is a follovver on the drive to drive link Master The drive is the master on the drive to drive link Only one 2 drive can be the master at a time 3 configuration or a communication break is detected The drive trips on a fault 1 1 2 1 1 Parameters 219 57 03 Node address Sets the node address for a follower drive Each follower must have a dedicated node address Note If the drive is set to be the master on the drive to drive link this parameter has no effect the master is automatically assigned node address 0 Node address 1 57 04 Follower mask 1 On the master drive selects the followers to be polled If no response is received from a polled follower the action selected by parameter 57 02 Comm loss func is taken The least significant
157. ent is not as expected during brake closing Mechanical brake control alarm Alarm is activated e g if brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake opening Safe Torque Off function is active i e safety circuit signal s connected to connector X6 is lost while drive is stopped and parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic is set to Alarm Error in changing Safe Torque Off supervision i e parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Alarm Check brake open torque setting parameter 42 08 Check drive torque and current limits See parameter group 20 Limits Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl To determine whether problem is with acknowledgement signal or brake check if brake is closed or open Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl To determine whether problem is with acknowledgement signal or brake check if brake is closed or open Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 261 Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 MOTOR TEMPERATURE 0x4310 Programmable fault 31 01 Mot temp1 prot EMERGENCY OFF 0xF083 RUN ENABLE OxFF54 ID RUN OxFF84 EMERGENCY STOP OxF08
158. er 44 33 kWh inv alm sel is given 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for the energy counter 121kWh Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter Add cool fan Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter LEN s EEE AI 1 5 Cabinet fan Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter 45 Energy optimising Energy optimization settings See also section Energy optimizer on page 62 45 01 Energy optim Enables disables energy optimization function The function optimizes the flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed Energy optimization disabled Energy optimization enabled 45 02 Energy tariff1 Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when savings are calculated See parameters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 0 00 Price of energy per kWh 21474836 47 45 06 E tariff unit Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation 45 08 Pump ref power Motor power when connected directly to supply Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 Note The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy o
159. er 50 04 Fba ref1 modesel See parameter 50 04 Fba ref1 modesel See parameter 50 04 Fba ref1 modesel a See parameter 50 04 Fba modesel 2 50 06 Fba tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 1 when parameter 50 04 Fba ref1 modesel 50 05 Fba ref2 modesel is set to Raw data Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 93 50 07 Fba act2 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 2 when parameter 50 04 Fba ref1 modesel 50 05 Fba ref2 modesel is set to Raw data Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 50 08 Fba sw b12 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 28 02 24 FBA main sw bit 28 SW B28 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 50 09 Fba sw b13 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 29 02 24 FBA main sw bit 29 SW B29 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 50 10 Fba sw b14 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 30 02 24 FBA main sw bit 30 SW B30 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 50 11 Fba sw b15 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 31 02 24 FBA main sw bit 31 SW B31 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 216 Parameters 51 FBA settings Fieldbus adapter specific settings 51 01 FBAtype Displays t
160. ere the backup was made BACKUP INTERFACE VER Format version of the backup file FIRMWARE VERSION Information on the firmware UIFI Firmware of the ACS850 drive 1100 Firmware version e g 1 100 0 Firmware patch version PRODUCT VARIANT 3 ACS850 Standard control program 4 ACS850 FA Variant for factory applications You can scroll the information with keys A and Press EZ to return to the Par Backup SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC B BACKUP INFO BACKUP INTERFACE VER 0 3 0 3 FIRMWARE 0050 UIFI 1100 EXIT 00 do LOC U BACKUP INFO FIRMWARE VERSION UIFI 1100 0 UIFI 1100 0 PRODUCT VARIANT 3 EXIT 00 00 LOC U PAR BACKUP 1 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL 46 The ACS850 control panel B VO Settings In the I O Settings mode you can e check the parameter settings that configure the I Os of the drive check the parameters that have an input or output selected as their source or target edit the parameter setting start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Go to the Main menu by pressing SS if you are in the LOC MAIN MEN 1 Output mode v 2 Otherwise press EZ repeatedly until you get to th
161. erms and abbreviations on page 93 01 22 Power inu out see page 94 1073742102 01 23 Motor power see page 94 1073742103 1 SpRef unramp 03 03 SpeedRef unramp see page 107 1073742595 Parameters 189 35 02 Signal1 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35 06 Proc var1 max 04 06 Process var1 35 03 35 02 Signal selected by 35 01 Signal1 param 35 03 Signal1 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 07 Proc var1 min See diagram at parameter 35 02 Signal1 max 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process variable 1 1 1 value 35 04 Proc var1 dispf Scaling for process variable 1 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus AAA hb ER CIN 100000 1 Specifies the unit for parameter 04 06 Process var1 process variable 1 190 Parameters 13 mb N CG l NI N N gt 1 a 5 z o WE TI o olu co co N NI N 00 Oo Oo w o Gl N L 213 gt 69 00 B A BR B B l Y Oil A Cl N Ol O SISI SISI S 3 3 0 Qn l A gt B l l B BR El BI co O O o Cl xil BJ Gl N Ol O C1 Parameters 191 No Namevaus Rest 0 8 m 8 m E ss S 60h 8 s S8
162. f this value 00 0 1000 0 Motor power in percent of nominal motor power 45 09 Energy reset Resets the energy counters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 Reset not requested normal operation Local The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99 01 Language Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to Done 212 Parameters section DC voltage control on page 59 47 01 Overvolt ctrl Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque Note If a brake chopper and resistor or a regenerative supply section are included in the drive the controller must be disabled Overvoltage control disabled Overvoltage control enabled 47 02 Undervolt ctrl Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor torque the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with hig
163. fault information Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS on the main menu as shown in section Parameters on page 23 A user set is loaded through parameter 16 09 User set sel Select parameter group 16 System with keys CAD and amp w P Press to select parameter group 16 Select parameter 16 09 User set sel with keys A and K 9 Z Current value of each parameter is shown below its name Select the user set you want to load with keys A and Panel shows a text identifying the fault Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the Output mode Othervvise press EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC UY PAR GROUPS 16 12 Operating mode 13 Analogue inputs 14 Digital I O 15 Analogue outputs 00 00 SEL LOC Y PARAMETERS 1609 User set sel No request EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC PAR EDIT 1609 User set sel NO request 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC B PAR EDIT 1609 User set sel Load set 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC v FAULT FAULT 310 USERSET LOAD RESET EXIT LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER The ACS850 control panel 45 Go to the Par Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP LOC t PAR BACKUP 2 on the menu with keys A and 2 and pressing MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL Select SHOW BACKUP INFO with keys A and Em Press The display shows the following information about th drive from wh
164. fines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00 100000 00 1 Quadrature axis inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 20 PM angle offset Defines an angle offset between the zero position of the synchronous motor and the zero position of the position sensor Notes The value is in electrical degrees The electrical angle equals the mechanical angle multiplied by the number of motor pole pairs This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors Angle offset 1 1 99 Start up data Language selection motor configuration and ID run settings EZ 99 01 Language Selects the language of the control panel displays Note Not all languages listed belovv are necessarily supported 232 Parameters 99 04 Motor type Selects the motor type Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running AM Asynchronous motor Three phase AC induction motor with squirrel cage rotor PMSM Permanent magnet motor Three phase AC synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF voltage 99 05 Motor ctrl mode Selects the motor control mode DTC Direct torque control This mode is suitable for most applications Note Instead of direct torque control use scalar control with multimotor applications 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be
165. from PC tool or control panel 0 Local control is inactive Fault 1 1 No fault is active 0 Fault is active See chapter Fault tracing 104 Parameters No Name Value Description 06 02 Status word2 Status word 2 sent to the master Information tart act Drive start command is active 0 Drive start command is inactive top act Drive stop command is active 0 Drive stop command is inactive Ready relay 1 Ready to function run enable signal on no fault emergency stop signal off no ID run inhibition Connected by default to DIO1 by par 14 03 DIO1 out src 0 Not ready to function Modulating 1 Modulating IGBTs are controlled ie the drive is RUNNING 0 No modulation IGBTs are not controlled 4 Ref running 1 Normal operation is enabled Running Drive follows the given reference BEN Normal operation is disabled Drive is not following the given reference eg in magnetization phase drive is modulating 5 Jogging Jogging function 1 or 2 is active HM Jogging function is inactive 0 Emergency stop 1 is active 0 Emergency stop 1 is inactive Start inh 1 Maskable by par 12 01 Start inhibit start inhibit is active No maskable start inhibit is active Start inh 1 Non maskable start inhibit is active nomask 0 No non maskable start inhibit is active hrg rel Charging relay is closed closed 0 Charging relay is open to act
166. g so Da s b oo ay aaa dese Read 94 01 AGUA q IN 7 94 02 I O values MD 95 Os Control valles se S 6 RER ta bod ER H R aa dae 101 04A Appl vales cs us aa kalam oa pa AA A A 102 06 Drive status 103 Alarms amp Talis oriy ya adnan AR EK AAA ea aes 106 OF System IN O xu 6445545 7 4 RAP dao ek ga dns 108 10 Start stop a nn 109 11 Start st p MOUS lt pde a u bee eS See RA RAR ala AA 116 12 Operating Mode PL 118 13 Analogue inputs as acatar de dai a ada il s 119 14 Digital WO es LT A A AAA AA AAA 126 15 Amalogue OUNDING eo eea bue vos or ie eco dira 139 f scq PE 77 145 19 Speed calculatiGfli aii a AAA A 147 20 LIMIS e aa a id aaa iia pl 150 TTT 152 22 Speed ref ramp 155 239 DEC C a Cees a o R caer ee E ae Rae dalar de 158 24 TORQUE IN 166 25 Critical speed 9 0 rns 167 2b Constant Spegds ua a Va dic iode Eo b AC e oA Ia aba a x aC C Aka 168 Z1 Process PID oo o dre o X Rl Ebo d dodi ne QUE grates Sot dep go 170 30 Fault functions s 174 s ed IC I sib pooh ee we ILL LT a bara a R wees 177 32 A t matic reset tod S ide di T Shoes blew ee deed 182 33 SUDBP ISIDEL e itu cid Sad a daaa ara hd de a de nah dee a t Y 183 34 User load CUTE kuza az R ks DA REOR OR Ala baba ri aca LRH HEPA Ra Dea CRURA 186 do Process Val Table x
167. g ol p ds 80 Lz puewwos peeds juejsuo peeds jue suoy X ejeus peeds g LZ Jes ZIL peeds y0 Lz Jejutod no did 10d 10A Jeued z1 pza US aza za 94 Wel g4 pejeos ziv Pajeos UY 0 2 as 2 p ds 2012 d yulod mo did od JON Jeued z1 pza yer aza zaq MEE Leu p leos ziv p leos LIV oun v s p ds eo LZ 9uez es p ds L0 LZ Buidwes pue p ds 290 Control block diagrams C Hi ds jos bio 60 0 r 03u09 ds b10 UIN OL EZ did X 1400 yl ez 5 0162 ds uiui je 909 81 EZ ds uiu je ood Z EZ ds ulu ydepe ld 9 1 ds xew 3depe Id gL CZ m eumiuy ueg po ez euin uoneAueq 0 ez I aun ZO ez ure 10 Z yy d n peeds 2060 043009 ds bio xey 60 c bio duoooov80 0 pesn jeypeeds 90 60 Ol um J3peeds e LYZ Iu Um 9 2162 oun ulm J3peeds ez p pa Buljpuey 10119 p ds peeds ulnulxeiy 10 0z ud peeds s0j 0 1010 ol z ui dwey ZL 14 20790 0Jez no dwey pL 4 Z0 90 p ds uunulluliN Zo Oz 0 ANIPPE peeds g CZ jespeeds S0 0 Ed p euin duos 29v 90 z eur Jaq duioo 2oy S0 z
168. g FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 14 Digital I O page 126 Programmable relay outputs The drive has three relay outputs The signal to be indicated by the outputs can be selected by parameters Relay outputs can be added by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 14 Digital I O page 126 Programmable protection functions E Start interlock parameter 70 20 The parameter selects how the drive reacts to loss of start interlock signal DIIL Program features 73 B External fault parameter 30 07 A source for an external fault signal is selected by this parameter When the signal is lost a fault is generated B Local control loss detection parameter 30 03 The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break E Motor phase loss detection parameter 30 04 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected B Earth fault detection parameter 30 05 The earth fault detection function is based on sum current measurement Note that an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection in a grounded supply the protection activates in 200 milliseconds in an ungrounded supply the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres will not activate the protection the protection is deactivated when the drive is st
169. g and 19 07 Zero speed delay Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running tina as rated by 0207 DI stats BS ITADTUDT DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 08 Jog2 start If enabled by parameter 10 09 Jog enable selects the source for the activation of jogging function 2 Jogging function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 10 09 1 7 Active See also parameter 10 07 Jog1 start Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 09 Jog enable Selects the source for enabling parameters 10 07 Jog1 start and 10 08 Jog2 start Note Jogging can be enabled using this parameter only when no start command from an external control location is active On the other hand if jogging is already enabled the drive cannot be started from an external control location apart from jog commands through fieldbus Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 014 Digital input 014 as indicated by 02 07 DI status bit 3
170. g power which will NE raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value The value is used in the overload protection 0 0000 Maximum continuous braking power 10000 10000 0000 kW 1 kW 48 05 Rbr Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor The value is used for brake chopper protection 0 1000 Brake resistor resistance value 10000 1000 0000 ohm 1 ohm 48 06 Brtemp faultlim Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor temperature supervision The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 48 04 Br power max cnt When the limit is exceeded the drive trips on fault BR OVERHEAT 0 150 Brake resistor temperature fault limit 1 1 48 07 Br temp alarmlim Selects the alarm limit for the brake resistor temperature supervision The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 48 04 Br power max cnt When the limit is exceeded the drive generates a BR OVERHEAT alarm Brake resistor temperature alarm limit 49 Data storage Data storage parameters reserved for the user These parameters can be written to and read from using other parameters pointer settings Four 16 bit and four 32 bit storage parameters are available un AN 002 Daa storage Date sorgeme 2003 Data soree pemer HR Daa sorgo Date sorena 214 Parameters
171. ge TUNT Z 0 100 _ LH hp AAA is hp 0 2747483647 Run Oms ION a 2147483647 07 26 On time counter 18182 32 0 357391 h Om 07 27 Runtime counter 1182 32 397813941 h m Tms 01 29 Torg nom scale INTS2 32 0 2147483547 Nm 07 30 Polepars nrz 16 9 400 _ 07 37 Mech time const REAL 32 0 32767 s T ms 0132 01 07 32 Temp phaseA REALZA 01 33 Temp phase B REALA 46 0 100 2ms gt 07 34 Temp phase C REALZA 16 0 100 2ms 01 35 Saved energy INTS2 32 0 2147488647 k n oms 1 07 36 Saved amount 4132 32 02147483647 Oms 01 37 Saved 602 Ta2 32 0 2147488647 t 0210 values 5 4 02 VO values mm m m Fem o o 1 0b11111111 emm o o 0b1111111 0b1111111111 e o mmm o 22 22 mA Ali scaed REM 32 3276832708 m Additional parameter data 241 Data Update No Name Tyee Range unit Ume Notes 22 22 MA 0207 Az scaled REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 0208 REL 16 2222 T mA 2ms 02 09 scaled REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms oropa REA 16 2222 m 2m Dz11 AMscaled REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 02 72 REA 16 2222 m 2m 0213 AIS scaled REAL 32 32768 32766 2ms 0214
172. ges the value faster D T Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value P 02 03 03 CANCEL 00 00 SEL To save the new value press x LOC I O SETTINGS l1 lo cancel the new value and keep the original press DI1 EZ 1002 Extl start inl DI DI3 1010 Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT 48 The ACS850 contro panel EB Reference Edit In the Reference Edit option you can accurately control the local reference value start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Editing is allowed only in the LOC state the option always edits the local reference value How to edit reference value If the panel is in the remote control mode REM shown on the status line switch to local control LOC shown on the status line by pressing 29 Reference editing is not enabled onl y in possible in remote control mode See page 20 for more local control mode information on switching between the local and remote control modes The display shows a message about that if you try to 00 00 enter REF EDIT in the remote control mode Otherwise go to the Main menu by pressing w if you OC U MAIN MENU 1 EJ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Reference Edit option by selecting REF EDIT LOC U REF EDIT on the menu with keys A and SY 7 and pressing 220000 00 rpm
173. gnal selected by parameter 15 07 AO2 src that corresponds to the maximum AO2 output value defined by parameter 15 09 AO2 out max lAo2 mA 15 09 15 10 j selected by par 15 07 lAo2 mA 15 09 Signal real selected by par 15 07 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output 1000 32768 000 value 142 Parameters 15 12 AO2 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 07 2 src that corresponds to the minimum AO1 output value defined by parameter 15 10 AO2 out min See parameter 15 11 AO2 src max 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 13 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analogue output EE A Motor speed see page 01 05 Motor current see page 94 ww zad 93 Pe m m sama tono T See parameter 15 02 AOT filt time 0 000 01000 30 000 000s Filter time constant time constant 10002 1s 1s S sein 616 AGS outmin Defines the minimum ouput value for analogue ouput AOS Parameters 143 15 17 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 13 AO3 src that corresponds to the maximum AO3 output value defined by parameter 15 75 AO3 out max laos MA Signal real selected by par 15 13 laos MA 15 15 Signal real selected by par 15 13 32768 000 R
174. h inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 47 04 Supply voltage Defines the nominal supply voltage Used if auto identification of the supply voltage is not enabled by parameter 47 03 SupplyVoltAutold Nominal supply voltage 48 Brake chopper Control of the brake chopper 48 01 Bc enable Enables the brake chopper control Note Before enabling the brake chopper control ensure that a brake resistor is connected and the overvoltage control is switched off parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl 1 EnableTherm Brake chopper control enabled with resistor overload protection Enable Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload protection This setting can be used for example if the resistor is equipped with a thermal circuit breaker that is wired to stop the drive if the resistor overheats Parameters 213 48 02 Bc run time ena Selects the source for quick run time brake chopper control 0 Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off 1 Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation The overvoltage control is automatically switched off This parameter can be used to program the chopper control to function only when the drive is operating in the generator mode Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 48 03 BrThermTimeConst Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor for overload protection 0 10000 s Brake resistor thermal time constant 48 04 Br power max cnt Defines the maximum continuous brakin
175. he essential changes and saves the result as a user parameter set Application macros are activated through the control panel main menu by selecting ASSISTANTS Firmware assistants Application Macro User parameter sets are managed by the parameters in group 16 System page 145 82 Application macros Factory macro The Factory macro is suited to relatively straightforward speed control applications such as conveyors pumps and fans and test benches In external control the control location is EXT1 The drive is speed controlled the reference signal is connected to analog input AI1 The sign of the reference determines the running direction The start stop commands are given through digital input DI1 Faults are reset through DI3 The default parameter settings for the Factory macro are listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 237 Application macros 83 B Default control connections for the Factory macro External power input 24V1 24 V DC 1 6A Relay output RO1 Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A COM XRO1 Relay output RO2 Modulating 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A N Relay output RO3 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A 2 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC Digital input output ground 24V DIGN 24V DIOGND XD24 XRO3 XRO2 Q UE DI DIO grounding selection jumpers Digital input DI1 Stop Start DI1 Digital input DI2 DI2 Digital input DI3 Rese
176. he type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 Fieldbus module is not found or it is not properly connected or parameter 50 01 Fba enable is set to Disable 1 FPBA xx PROFIBUS DP adapter module 32 FCAN xx CANopen adapter module 37 FDNA xx DeviceNet adapter module 51 02 FBA parz Parameters 51 02 51 26 are adapter module specific For more information see the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible 51 26 FBA par26 See parameter 51 02 FBA par2 51 27 FBA par refresh Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to Done Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 51 28 Partable ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive In format xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number Z correction number 51 29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 0 65535 Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file 121 51 30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format Example 1 7 revision 1 0 65535 Mapping file revision 51 31 D2FBA comm sta Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter modu
177. hort supply break Tm fo bc Nm Hz VDC Upc 160 80 520 120 60 390 fout 80 40 260 Tu 40 20 130 t s 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout output frequency of the drive Tw motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fout 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy B Voltage control and trip limits The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative either to a supply voltage value provided by the user or to an automatically determined supply voltage The actual voltage used is shown by parameter 01 19 Used supply volt The DC voltage Upc equals 1 35 times this value Automatic identification of the supply voltage is performed every time the drive is powered on Automatic identification can be disabled by parameter 47 03 SupplyVoltAutold the user can then define the voltage manually at parameter 47 04 Supply voltage Program features 61 SS Overvoltage trip level 1 63 x Upc 70V LM LL Overvoltage control level 01 07 Dc voltage Upc 1 35 x 01 19 Used supply volt A Undervoltage con
178. icients are defined individually for both gain and integration time When the actual speed is below or equal to 23 16 PI adapt min sp 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time are multiplied by 23 17 Pcoef at min sp and 23 18 Icoef at min sp respectively When the actual speed is equal to or exceeds 23 15 PI adapt max sp no adaptation takes place in other words 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time are used as such Between 23 16 PI adapt min sp and 23 15 PI adapt max sp the coefficients are calculated linearly on the basis of the breakpoints Coefficient for K or T 23 17 Pcoef at min sp or 23 18 Icoef at min sp Actual speed rpm 23 16 PI adapt 23 15 Pl adapt min sp max sp Kp Proportional gain T Integration time 0 30000 rpm Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation 23 16 Pl adapt min sp Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation See parameter 23 15 PI adapt max sp 0 30000 rpm Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation 23 17 Pcoef at min sp Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed See parameter 23 15 PI adapt max sp 0 000 10 000 Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed 23 18 Icoef at min sp Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed See parameter 23 15 PI adapt max sp 0 000 10 000 Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed Parameters 165 23 20 PI tune mode Activates the speed control
179. im Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of fault limit Ananalogue inputhasreached Check analogue input source and limit defined by parameter connections 13 33 AI superv cw Check analogue input minimum and maximum limit settings Fault tracing 273 Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0050 ENCODER 1 CABLE Encoder 1 cable fault detected Check cable between FEN xx interface 0x7389 and encoder 1 After any modifications in Programmable fault cabling re configure interface by 90 05 Enc cable fault Switching drive power off and on or by activating parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh 0051 ENCODER 2 CABLE Encoder 2 cable fault detected Check cable between FEN xx interface 0x738A and encoder 2 After any modifications in Programmable fault cabling re configure interface by 90 05 Enc cable fault switching drive power off and on or by activating parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh indicated by alarm A 2042 for example start inhibition is requested but not granted 0053 D2D COMM On the master drive The drive Check that all drives that are polled 0x7520 has not been replied to by an parameters 57 04 Follower mask 1 and Programmable fault activated follower for five 57 05 Follower mask 2 on the drive to 57 02 Comm loss func consecutive polling cycles drive link are powered properly
180. insufficient 30 09 Stall function motor power 0060 LOAD CURVE Overload or underload limit Check the settings of the parameters in 0x2312 has been exceeded group 34 User load curve Programmable fault 34 01 Overload func 34 02 Underload func 274 Fault tracing Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0201 0202 SPEED FEEDBACK 0x8480 D2D SLOT COMM 0x7584 MOTOR TEMP2 0x4313 Programmable fault 31 05 Mot temp2 prot IGBT OVERLOAD 0x5482 IGBT TEMP 0x4210 T2 OVERLOAD 0x0201 T3 OVERLOAD 0x6100 No speed feedback is received Drive to drive link is set to use an FSCA module for communication but no module is detected in specified slot Estimated motor temperature based on motor thermal model has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31 08 Mot temp2 fltLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 37 08 Mot temp2 fitLim Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature This fault protects the IGBT s and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Drive module temperature is excessive Firmware time level 2 overload Note This fault cannot be reset Firmware time level 3 overload Note This fault cannot be reset Check the settings of the parameters in group 19 Speed calculation Check encoder installation See the descripti
181. interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 2 is used for the temperature supervision Note This selection does not apply to FEN 01 PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1 3 PTC sensors connected to drive thermistor input TH PTC ist FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 1 is used for the temperature supervision 178 Parameters PTC 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 2 is used for the temperature supervision Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output Al1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is s
182. ions on page 93 14 70 ROT src Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO7 fl Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer Parameters 139 15 Analogue outputs Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs See section Programmable analog outputs on page 72 15 01 AO1 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analogue output AO1 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 15 02 AO filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 Unfiltered signal 100 63 j 4 Filtered signal s Oz 1x 1 ef1 filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 15 03 AO1 out max Defines the maximum output value for analogue output AO1 0 000 22 700 mA Maximum AO1 output value 1000 1 mA 1000 1s 15 04 AO1 out min Defines the minimum output value for analogue output AO1 0 000 22 700 mA Minimum AO1 output value 1000 1 mA 140 Parameters 15 05 AO1 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 01 AO1 src that corresponds to the maximum AO1 output value defined by parameter 15 03 AO1 out max lAo1 mA Signal real selected by par 15 01 Signal real selected by par 15 01 32768 000 Real signa
183. issioning and maintenance The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control Changing the control location to local can be disabled by parameter 16 01 Local lock The user can select by a parameter 30 03 Local ctrl loss how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break Control locations and operating modes 55 B External control When the drive is in external control control commands are given through the fieldbus interface via an optional fieldbus adapter module the I O terminals digital and analogue inputs optional I O extension modules or the drive to drive link External references are given through the fieldbus interface analogue inputs drive to drive link and encoder inputs Two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are available The user can select control signals e g start and stop and control modes for both external control locations Depending on the user selection either EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time Selection between 1 2 is done via digital inputs or fieldbus control word Operating modes of the drive The drive can operate in several control modes B Speed control mode Motor rotates at a speed proportional to the speed reference given to the drive This mode can be used either with estimated speed used as feedback or with an encoder or resolver for better speed accuracy Speed control mode is available in both loca
184. ital inputs DI4 DI6 see parameter 26 01 Const speed func Two acceleration deceleration ramps are selectable through DI3 An external speed reference can be given through analog input AI1 The reference is active only when no constant speed is activated all of the digital inputs DI4 DI6 are off Operational commands can also be given from the control panel Operation diagram The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro Speed Speed 3 Speed 2 Stop along deceleration ramp Speed 1 Time Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2 nn o B NMNM A E 06 A 7 8 lt A 8 6 O 0 nmnvn 00 0e Start Stop Accel1 Decel1 Speed 1 Speed 2 Accel2 Decel2 Speed 3 Application macros 91 Default parameter settings for Sequential control macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 237 Names macro default 22 01 Acc Dec sel 26 01 Const speed func 0b01 0501 Const speed sel1 92 Application macros B Default control connections for the Sequential control macro A E 24 V DC 1 6A 6 GND 2 v Relay output RO1 Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XRO1 Relay output RO2 Modulating N 250 V AC 30 V DC g com 5 2 s Relay output RO3 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 9 COM 2A x z O D D D XD24 N A XDI Digital input DI6 or thermistor input
185. ithout incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 SSI encoder is selected by setting parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf to SSI Initial pos Single position transfer mode initial position Continuous position transfer mode 1 91 26 SSI transmit cyc Selects the transmission cycle for SSI encoder Note This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI encoder is used in continuous mode i e without incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 SSI encoder is selected by setting parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf to SSI 91 27 SSI zero phase Defines the phase angle within one sine cosine signal period that corresponds to the value of zero on the SSI serial link data The parameter is used to adjust the synchronization of the SSI position data and the position based on sine cosine incremental signals Incorrect synchronization may cause an error of 1 incremental period Note This parameter needs only be set when an SSI encoder with sine cosine incremental signals is used in initial position mode z 91 30 Endat mode Selects the EnDat encoder mode Note This parameter needs to be set only when an EnDat encoder is used in continuous mode i e without incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 EnDat encoder is selected by setting parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf to EnDat Initial pos Single position data transfer initial position Continuous Continuous position data transfer mode 22
186. its used in revolution count for multiturn encoders Used with serial interfaces i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is EnDat Hiperface SSI or Tamag 17 33b 0 32 Number of bits For example 4096 revolutions corresponds 1 1 to 12 bits 1 1 1 91 01 Sine cosine nr Defines the number of sine cosine wave cycles within one 1 226 Parameters 91 04 Pos data bits Defines the number of bits used within one revolution Used with serial interfaces i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is EnDat Hiperface SSI or Tamag 17 33b Number of bits For example 32768 positions per revolution corresponds to 15 bits 91 05 Refmark ena Enables the encoder zero pulse if used Zero pulse can be used for position latching Note With serial interfaces i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is EnDat Hiperface SSI or Tamag 17 33b zero pulse must be disabled 91 10 Hiperface parity Defines the use of parity and stop bits for HIPERFACE encoder i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is Hiperface Typically this parameter does not need to be set 0d Odd parity indication bit one stop bit Even parity indication bit one stop bit 91 11 Hiperf baudrate Defines the transfer rate of the link for HIPERFACE encoder i e when parameter 91 02 Abs enc interf setting is Hiperface Typically this parameter does not need to be set 4800 4800 bit s 9600 9600 bit s 19200 19200 bit
187. ive on page 268 260 Fault tracing How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the RESET key on the control panel or PC tool or by switching the supply voltage off for a while When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted A fault can also be reset from an external source selected by parameter 10 10 Fault reset sel Fault history When fault is detected it is stored in the fault logger with a time stamp The fault history stores information on the 16 latest faults of the drive Three of the latest faults are stored at the beginning of a power switch off Parameters 08 01 Active fault and 08 02 Last fault store the fault codes of the most recent faults Alarms can be monitored via alarm words 08 05 Alarm word 08 08 Alarm word4 Alarm information is lost at power switch off or fault reset Alarm messages generated by the drive Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code BRAKE START TORQUE 0x7185 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func BRAKE NOT CLOSED 0x7186 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func BRAKE NOT OPEN 0x7187 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A Programmable fault 30 07 Sto diagnostic STO MODE CHANGE OxFF7A Mechanical brake alarm Alarm is activated if required motor starting torque 42 08 Brake open torq is not achieved Mechanical brake control alarm Alarm is activated e g if brake acknowledgem
188. k the drive to drive link wiring On a follower drive The drive Check the settings of parameters 57 06 has not received new Ref 1 src and 57 07 Ref 2 src on the reference 1 and or 2 for five master drive consecutive reference Check the drive to drive link wiring handling cycles Transmission of drive to drive Contact your local ABB representative references failed because of message buffer overflow Communication errors Check the connections between the JCU detected between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Control Unit and the power unit of the drive Restoration of backed up Contact your local ABB representative parameters failed Current measurement Informative alarm calibration will occur at next start Autophasing will occur at next Informative alarm start Drive has detected load Check there are no power factor unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge absorbers earth fault in motor or motor in motor cable cable Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative A fault is to be autoreset Informative alarm See parameter group 32 Automatic reset The motor configuration Check the settings of the motor parameters are set incorrectly configuration parameters in group 99 The drive is not dimensioned Check that the drive is sized correctly f
189. ke control supervision has not been activated by parameter 42 01 Brake ctrl this parameter is disabled Fault The drive trips on fault BRAKE NOT CLOSED BRAKE NOT OPEN if the status of the optional external brake acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake control function The drive trips on fault BRAKE START TORQUE if the required motor starting torque at brake release is not achieved Alarm The drive generates alarm BRAKE NOT CLOSED BRAKE 11 NOT OPEN if the status of the optional external brake acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake control function The drive generates alarm BRAKE START TORQUE if the required motor starting torque at brake release is not achieved Open fit The drive trips on fault BRAKE NOT CLOSED BRAKE NOT 2 OPEN if the status of the optional external brake acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake control function during the opening of the brake Other brake function errors generate alarm BRAKE NOT CLOSED BRAKE NOT OPEN 42 13 Close flt delay Defines a close fault delay i e the time between when the brake is closed and when a brake close fault is generated 0 00 60 00 s Brake close fault delay Parameters 205 44 Maintenance Maintenance counter configuration See also section Maintenance counters on page 65 44 01 Ontime1 func Configures on time counter 1 This counter runs whenever the signal selected by pa
190. l and external control B Torque control mode Motor torque is proportional to the torque reference given to the drive This mode can be used either with estimated speed used as feedback or with an encoder or resolver for more accurate and dynamic motor control Torque control mode is available in both local and external control E Special control modes In addition to the above mentioned control modes the following special control modes are available e Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3 Drive stops along the defined deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops Jogging mode Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the jogging signal is activated For more information see parameter group 10 Start stop on page 109 56 Control locations and operating modes Program features 57 Program features What this chapter contains This chapter describes the features of the control program 58 Program features Application macros See chapter Application macros page 87 Automatic fault resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below minimum faults By default automatic resets are off and must be separately activated by the user Settings Parameter group 32 Automatic reset page 182 Autophasing Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position of the magnetic flux of a perma
191. l value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 06 1 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 01 AO1 src that corresponds to the minimum 1 output value defined by parameter 15 04 AO1 out min See parameter 15 05 AO1 src max 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 07 2 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analogue output IEEE 2 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 Current 01 05 Motor current see page 94 Parameters 141 SpRef used 03 06 SpeedRef used see page 107 1073742598 TorqRef used 03 14 Torq ref used see page 107 1073742606 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 04 03 Process act see page 102 1073742851 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page EE 93 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 15 09 AO2 out max Defines the maximum output value for analogue output AO2 0 000 22 700 mA Maximum 2 output value 1000 1 mA 15 08 2 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 See parameter 15 02 1 filt time SpRef ramped 03 05 SpeedRef ramped see page 101 1073742597 15 10 AO2 out min Defines the minimum output value for analogue output AO2 Poo 1 0 000 22 700 mA Minimum A02 output value 1000 1 mA 15 11 AO2 src max Defines the real value of the si
192. ldbus adapter module 284 Fieldbus control B Fieldbus references References FBA REF are 16 32 bit signed integers A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as torque or speed reference When torque or speed reference scaling is selected by parameter 50 04 Fba modesel 50 05 Fba ref2 modesel the fieldbus references are 32 bit integers The value consists of a 16 bit integer value and a 16 bit fractional value The speed torque reference scaling is as follows Speed reference FBA REF 65536 Final reference is limited by parameters value in rpm 20 01 Maximum speed 20 02 Minimum speed and 21 09 SpeedRef min abs Torque reference FBA REF 65536 Final reference is limited by torque limit value in parameters 20 06 20 10 E State diagram Fieldbus control 285 The following presents the state diagram for the FBA communication profile For other profiles see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module from any state Fault TN RUN n FBA SW Bit 16 1 FBA SW Bit 1 FAULT i DISABLE i FBA CW Bit 8 1 T Par 10 19 1 Par 10 19 KJ START INHIBITED MAINS OFF L Povver ON LA a READY TO START B C D E FBA CW lt FBA CW Bit 12 0 V L CD RUNNING A lt
193. le communication Adapter is initializing Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive Conf err Adapter configuration error The major or minor revision code 3 of the common program revision in the fieldbus adapter module is not the revision required by the module see parameter 51 32 FBA comm sw ver or mapping file upload has failed more than three times Adapter is performing a hardware reset 6 Parameters 217 51 32 FBA comm sw ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy minor revision numbers z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 90A Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy minor revision numbers z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 90A controller the drive to the fieldbus controller Actual value 1 16 bits TIN 52 12 FBA data in12 See parameter 52 01 FBA data in1 53 FBA data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive 53 01 FBA data out1 Parameters 53 01 53 12 select data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive 11 Control Word 32 bits ENEE AO 56 Panel display Selection of signals to be displayed on control panel 56 01 Signal1 param Selects the first signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default sig
194. le load curve In practice the user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve even though neither is compulsory Each curve is formed by five points that represent output current or torque as a function of frequency An alarm or fault can be set up to occur when the curve is exceeded The upper boundary overload curve can also be used as a torque or current limiter Settings Parameter group 34 User load curve page 186 User definable U f curve The user can define a custom U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency The curve can be used in special applications where linear and quadratic U f ratios are not adequate e g when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Note Each user defined point must have a higher frequency and higher voltage than the previous point WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance N or motor damage due to overheating Settings Parameter group 38 Flux ref page 199 80 Program features Application macros 81 Application macros What this chapter contains This chapter describes the intended use operation and default control connections of the application macros More information on the connectivity of the JCU control unit is given in the Hardware Manual of the drive General Application macros are pre defined parameter sets When starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros as a basis makes t
195. ler autotune function The autotune will automatically set parameters 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time as well as 01 31 Mech time const If the User autotune mode is chosen also 23 07 Speed err Ftime is automatically set The status of the autotune routine is shown by parameter 06 03 Speed ctrl stat WARNING The motor will reach the torque and current limits during the autotune routine ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE AUTOTUNE ROUTINE Notes Before using the autotune function the following parameters should be set All parameters adjusted during the start up as described in the ACS850 Standard Control Program Quick Start up Guide 19 01 Speed scaling 19 03 MotorSpeed filt 19 06 Zero speed limit Speed reference ramp settings in group 22 Speed ref ramp 23 07 Speed err Ftime The drive must be in local control mode and stopped before an autotune is requested After requesting an autotune with this parameter start the drive within 20 seconds Wait until the autotune routine is completed this parameter has reverted to the value Done The routine can be aborted by stopping the drive See also section Speed controller tuning page 74 Done No tuning has been requested normal operation The parameter also reverts to this value after an autotune is completed Smooth Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for smooth operation Request speed controller autotune with prese
196. leted successfully Replace brake chopper Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged Let chopper cool down Check resistor overload protection function settings parameters 48 01 48 05 Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive Stop drive Let resistor cool down Check resistor overload protection function settings parameters 48 01 48 05 Check fault limit setting parameter 48 06 Br temp faultlim Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Contact your local ABB representative Check input power connections Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Connect motor cable Check motor settings parameters 99 04 99 13 Check that no limits prevent ID run The following must apply 20 05 Maximum current 99 06 Mot nom current For Reduced and Normal ID run 20 01 Maximum speed gt 55 of 99 09 Mot nom speed 20 02 Minimum speed lt 0 Supply voltage gt 65 of 99 07 Mot nom voltage Maximum torque selected by 20 06 Torg lim sel gt 100 only for Normal ID run Retry 270 Fault tracing Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 CURR U2 MEAS 0x3184 CURR V2 MEAS 0x3185 CURR W2 MEAS 0x3186 STO1 LOST 0x8182 STO2 LOST 0x8183 STO MODE CHANGE INTBOARD OVERTEMP
197. locations and operating modes What this chapter contains This chapter describes the control locations and operating modes of the drive 54 Control locations and operating modes Local control vs external control The drive has two main control locations external and local The control location is selected with the LOC REM key on the control panel or with the PC tool Take Release button ACS850 o o row o bi 2 I O F A m 7 a External control S yo 99 I eef r 1 PLC Local control Programmable Logic Controller ge a 5 E I I I E Drive to drive link m l l eo m Control PC tool I on DriveStudio ool SE a Fieldbus adapter o Fxxx in Slot 3 optional l 20060 ee J Ls ees a a 4 3 Encoder 1 Extra inputs outputs can be added by installing optional I O extension modules FIO xx in drive Slot 1 2 2 Encoder or resolver interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 3 Two encoder resolver interface modules of the same type are not allowed B Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC equipped with DriveStudio when the drive is in local control Soeed and torque control modes are available for local control Local control is mainly used during comm
198. log input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim Defines the alarm limit for the motor thermal protection 2 when parameter 37 05 Mot temp2 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault 200 C Motor overtemperature alarm limit 31 08 Mottemp2 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 2 when parameter 31 05 Mot temp2 prot is set to Fault 0 200 C Motor overtemperature fault limit 31 09 Mot ambient temp Defines the ambient temperature for the thermal protection mode 60 100 C Ambient temperature 31 10 Motload curve Defines the load curve together with parameters 31 11 Zero speed load and 31 12 Break point When the parameter is set to 10096 the maximum load is equal to the value of parameter 99 06 Mot nom current higher loads heat up the motor The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated Motor current In Nominal motor current Drive output frequency Maximum load for the motor load curve Parameters 181 31 11 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 37 10 Mot load curve and 31 12 Break point Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the
199. m frequency 1 14 61 Freq out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output DIO3 when 14 10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 138 Parameters 14 62 Freq out max src When 14 10 DIOS conf is set to Freq output defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 61 Freq out src that corresponds to the maximum DIO3 frequency output value defined by parameter 14 64 Freq out max sca fpioa Hz Signal real selected by par 14 61 Hz 14 64 Signal real selected by par 14 61 0 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum DIO3 output 121 frequency 14 63 Freq out min src When 14 10 DIOS conf is set to Freq output defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 61 Freq out src that corresponds to the minimum DIO3 frequency 7 value defined by parameter 14 65 Freq out min sca 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum DIO3 output frequency 14 64 Freq out max sca When 14 10 DIOS conf is set to Freq output defines the maximum DIO3 output frequency 3 32768 Hz Maximum DIO3 output frequency 14 65 Freq out min sca When 14 10 DIOS conf is set to Freq output defines the minimum DIO3 output frequency 3 32768 Hz Minimum DIO3 output frequency 14 67 ROD src Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO6 2 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviat
200. m parameter 04 10 Counter ontime2 Bit 1 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 06 Ontime2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func Relay output RO1 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 1073742338 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073939969 Charged Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074333186 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 44 07 Ontime2 limit Sets the alarm limit for on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func 0 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on time counter 2 1 15 44 08 Ontime2 alm sel Selects the alarm for on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func On time2 Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Device clean Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Add cool fan Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Cabinet fan Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Dc capacitor Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Parameters 207 44 09 Edge count1 func Configures rising edge counter 1 This counter is incremented every
201. meter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O 1073742337 D6 o Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat The bit is on when 1074005518 any one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 06 0 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2 See parameter 10 04 Ext2 start func selection 3 wire Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 DIO5 Digital input output DIOS as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 112 Parameters 10 07 Jog1 start If enabled by parameter 10 09 Jog enable selects the source for the activation of jogging function 1 Jogging function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 10 09 1 7 Active See also other jogging function parameters 10 08 Jog2 start 10 09 Jog enable 21 07 Speed ref jog1 21 08 Speed ref jog2 22 10 Acc time jogging 22 11 Dec time joggin
202. min defined by parameter 23 10 Min torq sp ctrl pd ctl tlim peed controller output maximum torque limit Is active The limit is max defined by parameter 23 09 Max torq sp ctrl Torq re Torque reference 03 11 Torq ref ramped maximum limit is active The max limit is defined by parameter 24 03 Maximum torq ref Torq ref min 1 Torque reference 03 11 Torq ref ramped minimum limit is active The limit is defined by parameter 24 04 Minimum torq ref 5 Tim max Torque reference maximum value is limited by the rush control because speed of maximum speed limit 20 01 Maximum speed Tlim min 1 Torque reference minimum value is limited by the rush control because speed of minimum speed limit 20 02 Minimum speed 106 Parameters 06 07 Torq lim status Torque controller limitation status word Information Undervolt Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage age Overvoltage ntermediate circuit DC overvoltage 2 Minimum Torque reference minimum limit is active The limit is defined by torque parameter 24 04 Minimum torq ref 3 Maximum Torque reference maximum limit is active The limit is defined by torque parameter 24 03 Maximum torq ref 4 Internal cur 1 An inverter current limit is active The limit is identified by bits 8 11 rent 5 Load angle 1 For permanent magnet motor only Load angle limit is active i e the motor cannot produce more torque Motor pull 1 For asynchronous motor only Mot
203. n page 93 30 Fault functions Selects the behavior of the drive upon various fault situations 30 01 External fault Selects an source for an external fault signal 0 External fault trip 1 No external fault DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Parameters 175 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 30 02 Speed ref safe Defines the safe speed reference that is used with the Spd ref Safe setting of supervision parameters 13 32 Al superv func 30 03 Local ctrl loss or 50 02 Comm loss func upon an alarm This speed is used when the parameter is set to Spd ref Safe 30000 30000 Safe speed reference rom 30 03 Local ctrl loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break No action taken Drive trips on fault LOCAL CTRL LOSS Spd ref Safe The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS and sets the 2 speed to the speed defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case of a communication break Last speed The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS and freezes 3 the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING
204. n program revision of SW ver the adapter module 51 33 FBA appl sw ver Note In the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module the parameter group number is 1 or A for parameters 51 01 51 26 Displays the application program revision of the adapter module TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION see also page 217 52 01 FBA data in1 4 6 Defines the data transmitted from drive to 52 12 FBA data 14 16 fieldbus controller in12 101 9999 Note If the selected data is 32 bits long two parameters are reserved for the transmission 53 01 FBA data out1 1 3 Defines the data transmitted from fieldbus 53 12 FBA data 11 13 controller to drive out12 1001 9999 Note If the selected data is 32 bits long two parameters are reserved for the transmission Note In the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module the parameter group number is 3 or C for parameters 52 01 52 12 and 2 or B for parameters 53 01 53 12 After the module configuration parameters have been set the drive control parameters see section Drive control parameters below must be checked and adjusted when necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time before powering off the drive wait at least 1 minute or when parameter 51 27 FBA par refresh is activated Fieldbus control 281 Drive control parameters The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the
205. n the Parameter Backup option you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel with MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run View the information about the backup stored in the control panel with SHOW BACKUP INFO This includes e g version information etc of the current backup file in the panel It is useful to check this information when you are going to restore the parameters to another drive with RESTORE PARS ALL to ensure that the drives are compatible Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive using the RESTORE PARS ALL command This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does NOT include the user sets of parameters Note Use this function only to restore the parameters from a backup or to restore parameters to systems that are compatible Restore all parameters except motor data to the drive with RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN Restore only motor data parameters to the drive with RESTORE PARS IDRUN Restore all user sets to the drive with RESTORE ALL USER SETS Restore only user set 1 4 to the drive with RESTORE USER SET 1 RESTORE USER SET 4 How to backup and restore parameters For all backup and restore functions available see page 38 Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the L
206. n the motor cable Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve Check the settings of the parameters in group 38 Flux ref Check the settings of the parameters in group 19 Speed calculation Check encoder installation See the description of fault 0039 for more information Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 and or Slot 2 Check that option modules or Slot 1 2 connectors are not damaged To determine whether module or connector is damaged Test each module individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2 Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 06 Mot temp2 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor cable Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power 266 Fault tracing Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code COOLAL
207. n the selected date format with keys A and 19 KW LZ and press Repeat for the second part After specifying the amp year press 5x To cancel your changes press EP CANCEL 00 00 OK To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions LOC UY DAYLIGHT SAV 1 according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press Pressing 42 opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed Scroll the text with keys A and SA To return to the EXIT 00 00 SEL previous display press EZ Loc U HELP To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press E Mar last Sunday To enable automatic clock transitions select the country Off Oct last Sunday or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press 5 To return to the previous display without making EXIT 00 00 changes press CZ 38 The ACS850 contro panel E Parameter Backup The Parameter Backup option is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading stores all drive parameters including up to four user sets to the Control Panel Selectable subsets of the backup file can then be restored downloaded from the control panel to the same drive or another drive of the same type I
208. n time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force Dita npa ls cta by 0207 Dr ns BS TOUT Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 22 02 Acc time1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits S 156 Parameters 22 03 Dec time Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl Note If a short deceleratio
209. n time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e g with a brake chopper built in and a brake resistor S 22 04 Acc time2 Defines acceleration time 2 See parameter 22 02 Acc time1 S 22 05 Dec time2 Defines deceleration time 2 See parameter 22 03 Dec time1 S Parameters 157 22 06 Shape time acc1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the beginning of the acceleration 0 000 s Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps 0 001 1000 000 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between Acceleration Linear ramp Par 22 07 0s Linear ramp Par 22 06 0s S curve ramp Par 22 07 gt 0s S curve ramp P Par 22 06 gt 0s Deceleration Linear ramp Par 22 08 05 Linear ramp Par 22 09 05 S curve ramp Par 22 08 05 S curve ramp Par 22 09 0s xx 0 000 1800 000 1 Ramp shape at start of acceleration 1000 15 5 22 07 Shape time acc2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of the acceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time acc1 0 000 1800 000 Ramp shape at end of acceleration 1000 1 5 5 22 08 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the beginning of the deceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time acc1 0 000
210. nal is 01 03 Output frequency 00 00 255 255 1st signal to be displayed 56 02 Signal2 param Selects the second signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default signal is 01 04 Motor current 00 00 255 255 2nd signal to be displayed 218 Parameters 56 03 Signal3 param Selects the third signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default signal is 01 06 Motor torque 00 00 255 255 3rd signal to be displayed E 56 04 Signal1 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56 01 Signal1 param is displayed on the optional control panel Disabled Signal not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled 1 are shown together with their respective signal name Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit E Drive name Shows the drive name The drive name can be set using the 2 DriveStudio PC tool Drive type Shows the drive type 56 05 Signal2 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56 02 Signal2 param is displayed on the optional control panel Disabled Signal not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled 1 1 are shown together with their respective signal name Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit Shows the signal as a horizontal bar Drive name Shows the drive name The drive name can be set using the 2 DriveStudio PC tool Drive type Shows the drive type 56 06 Signal3 mode Defines the way the signal s
211. ncoder 1 within one revolution 100000000 1 rev 01 10 Encoder2 speed Encoder 2 speed in rpm 100 1 rpm 01 11 Encoder2 pos Actual position of encoder 2 within one revolution 100000000 1 rev 01 12 Pos act Actual position of encoder 1 in revolutions 1000 1 rev 01 13 Pos 2nd enc Scaled actual position of encoder 2 in revolutions 1000 1 rev 01 14 Motor speed est Estimated motor speed in rpm 100 1 rpm 01 15 Temp inverter Estimated temperature of drive heatsink in percent of fault 10 196 limit 01 16 Temp brk chopper Brake chopper IGBT temperature in percent of fault limit 10 1 01 17 Motor temp1 Measured temperature of motor 1 in degrees Celsius 10 1 C 01 18 Motor temp2 Measured temperature of motor 2 in degrees Celsius 10 1 C 01 19 Used supply volt Either the nominal supply voltage defined by parameter 47 04 10 1 Supply voltage or if auto identification is enabled by parameter 47 03 SupplyVoltAutold the automatically determined supply voltage 01 20 Brake res load Estimated temperature of the braking resistor The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 48 04 Br power max cnt 01 21 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent 1 1 01 22 Power inu out Drive output power in kW or hp depending on setting of 100 1 kW parameter 16 17 Power unit or hp 01 23 Motor power Measured motor power in kW or hp depending on setting of 100 1 kW
212. nd See parameter 20 03 Pos speed ena Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 a HT 20 05 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current 0 00 30000 00 A Maximum motor current 20 06 Torq lim sel Defines a source that selects between the two sets of torque limits defined by parameters 20 07 20 10 0 The torque limits defined by parameters 20 07 Maximum torque1 and 20 08 Minimum torque are in force 1 The torque limits defined by parameters 20 09 Maximum torque2 and 20 10 Minimum torque2 are in force Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 20 07 Maximum torque1 Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torq lim sel 0 0 1600 0 Maximum torque 1 10 196 152 Parameters No NamesValwe Deseripion BE Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Tord lim sel Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Tord lim sel PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 Max torque1 20 07 Maximum torque1 see page 151 1073746951 Mum E 93 Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive in percent of the E motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torq lim sel Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 20
213. nel in mounting platform Check analogue input source and connections Check analogue input minimum and maximum limit settings Check PLC programming Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check that all the required parameters in group 99 have been set Note It is normal for this alarm to appear during the start up until the motor data is entered Check parameter 90 01 Encoder 1 sel setting corresponds to actual encoder interface 1 FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 parameter 09 20 Option slot1 09 21 Option slot2 Note The new setting will only take effect after parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh is used or after the JCU Control Unit is powered up the next time 2030 ENCODER 2 FAILURE 0x7381 FEN TEMP MEAS FAILURE 0x7385 RESOLVER AUTOTUNE ERR 0x7388 ENCODER 1 CABLE 0x7389 Encoder 2 has been activated by parameter but the encoder interface FEN xx cannot be found Error in temperature measurement when temperature sensor KTY or PTC connected to encoder interface FEN xx is used Error in temperature measurement when KTY sensor connected to encoder interface FEN 01 is used Resolver autotuning routines which are automatically started when resolver input is activated for the first time have failed Encoder 1 cable fault detected Fault tracing 263 Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code 2023 2027 Check parameter 90 02 Encoder 2 sel setting co
214. nent magnet synchronous motor The motor control requires the absolute position of the rotor flux in order to control motor torque accurately Autophasing is applicable to permanent magnet synchronous motors in these cases One time measurement of the rotor and encoder position difference when an absolute encoder or resolver one pole pair is used Measurement at first start after each power up when an incremental encoder is used e With open loop motor control repetitive measurement of the rotor position at every start Several autophasing modes are available see parameter 11 07 Autophasing mode The turning mode is recommended especially with case 1 as it is the most robust and accurate method In turning mode the motor shaft is turned back and forward 360 polepairs in order to determine the rotor position In case 3 open loop control the shaft is turned only in one direction and the angle is smaller The standstill modes can be used if the motor cannot be turned for example when the load is connected As the characteristics of motors and loads differ testing must be done to find out the most suitable standstill mode A rotor position offset used in motor control can also be given by the user See parameter 97 20 PM angle offset Program features 59 The drive is capable of determining the rotor position when started to a running motor in open loop or closed loop modes In this situation the setting of 11 07 A
215. nf is set to Output See parameter 14 08 DIO2 Ton 0 0 3000 0 s Off deactivation delay for DIO2 when set as an output 14 10 DIO3 conf Selects whether DIOS is used as a digital output digital input or frequency output Output DIO3 is used as a digital output DIOS is used as a digital input 10 1 when 14 10 DIO3 conf is set to Output Fault 1 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1074529793 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 when 14 14 DIO4 conf is set to Output 1 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 gt 1 o 130 Parameters Bi o 06 02 Saus word eee page 0 Ready relay Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1073874434 i Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer when 14 18 DIO5 conf is set to Output Ready Bit 0 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073743361 Zero speed Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 105 1073808899 RunningRelay Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1073939970 Supervision1 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073743373 Supervision2 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073808909 Parameters 131 Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abb
216. ng DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up In applications where long DC hold times are required externally ventilated motors should be used If the DC hold period is long the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor 118 Parameters Turning This mode gives the most accurate autophasing result This mode can be used and is recommended if it is allowed for the motor to rotate during the ID run and the start up is not time critical Note This mode will cause the motor to rotate during the ID run Standstill 2 An alternative standstill autophasing mode that can be used if the Turning mode cannot be used and the Standstill 1 mode gives erratic results However this mode is considerably slower than Standstill 1 12 Operating mode Operating mode and external reference source selection 12 01 Ext1 Ext2 sel Selects the source for external control location EXT1 EXT2 selection 0 1 1 EXT2 DI1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 1 Digital input output DIOS as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 i Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 12 03 Ext1 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT1 Speed control Torque reference is 03 09 Torq ref sp ctrl Digital inp
217. nput parameter 14 06 is set to Freq input 02 21 Freqout Frequency output value of DIO3 when it is used as a 1000 1 Hz frequency output parameter 14 10 is set to Freq output Parameters 97 No Name Value Description 02 22 FBA main cw Control Word for fieldbus communication See also chapter Fieldbus control page 277 Log Logical combination i e Bit AND OR Selection parameter Par Selection parameter Bit Name Value formation 0 tes Par Stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode selected by par 11 03 Stop mode or according to the requested stop mode bits 2 6 Note Simultaneous stop and start commands result in a stop command 0 Noaction action Start as ar ram Note Simultaneous stop and start commands fo ad in a stop command No action StpMode EN OFF2 bit O must be 1 Drive is stopped em off by cutting off motor power supply the motor coasts to stop The drive will restart only with the next rising edge of the start signal when the run enable signal is on 0 1 Emergency stop OFF3 bit O must be 1 Stop within time defined by 22 12 Em stop time AND IN o action StpMode 1 Emergency stop OFF1 bit O must be 1 Stop along off1 the currently active deceleration ramp AND 0 Noado UE 1 Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp 27 0 No action StpMode ess to stop coast Oo No action Run enable 1 Ac
218. ns Timer1 ena Time period 1 enable S mimer2 ena Time period 2 enable 2 Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable 3 Timer4 ena Time period 4 enable Flux reference and U f curve settings See also section User definable U f curve on page 79 38 01 Flux ref Sets the flux reference in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq at field weakening point 0 2008 0 Flux reference at field weakening point 38 03 EE curve func Selects the form of the U f voltage frequency curve below the field weakening point Linear Linear U f curve Recommended for constant torque applications Quadratic Quadratic U f curve Recommended for centrifugal pump and 1 fan applications User Custom U f curve The curve is formed by the points defined 2 by parameters 38 04 38 13 38 04 U f curve freq1 Defines the frequency at the 1st point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 1st point frequency 38 05 U f curve freq2 Defines the frequency at the 2nd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 500 2nd point frequency 200 Parameters 38 06 U f curve freq3 Defines the frequency at the 3rd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 3rd point frequency 38 07 U f curve freq4 Defines the frequency at the 4th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 4th point frequency 38 08 U f c
219. nt1 lim N Edge count1 div Edg cnt1 alm sel Edge count2 func Edge count2 src Bit pointer UINT32 UINT32 enum A A a O Edge count2 lim 44 17 ala ala ala N N Ol O N cl O O O O Edge count2 div O Edg cnt2 alm sel A A AY A aja O Val count func 3 32 2 Val count1 src 44 21 Val count1 lim A A No e Val pointer UINT32 o o o 254 Additional parameter data Val count div UINT32 3 2 Val cnt1 alm sel enum 16 Rahde Default g Factory macro Mot bearing 1 0b00 0b11 0b01 Speed rpm 6570000 44 22 44 23 44 24 44 25 44 26 44 27 44 28 o 5 Val count2 func Val count2 src Val count2 lim Val count2 div Val cnt2 alm sel mei R 0 2147483647 0 00 h o 0 35791394 1 Runtime lim UINT32 Runtime alm sel kWh inv alm sel 45 Energy optimising Energy optim Energy tariff1 E tariff unit 1 k Pump ref power 1 5 09 Energy reset 7 Voltage ctrl 03 SupplyVoltAutold 6 7 04 Supply voltage 6 0 1000 0 8 Brake chopper Bc enable Bc run time ena 3 3 16 2 BrThermTimeConst 2 2 6 16 0 35791394 1 1 h 0 2147483647 5 o CEA YT p e 0 21474836 47 o 065 poe gno 1 250 MEM EN i x NN 0 2147483647 MES w o Bs MAH NN 1 O 32 32 32 16 32 32 32 3 3 AY A N R R R R w j N N ajl ol Mm 0 E o
220. ntrol Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller B Actual values Actual values ACT are 16 32 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive FBA communication profile The FBA communication profile is a state machine model which describes the general states and state transitions of the drive The State diagram on page 285 presents the most important states including the FBA profile state names The FBA Control Word parameter 02 24 see page 99 commands the transitions between these states and the FBA Status Word parameter 02 26 see page 100 indicates the status of the drive Fieldbus adapter module profile selected by adapter module parameter defines how the control word and status word are transmitted in a system which consists of fieldbus controller fieldbus adapter module and drive With transparent modes control word and status word are transmitted without any conversion between the fieldbus controller and the drive With other profiles e g PROFIdrive for FPBA 01 AC DC drive for FDNA 01 DS 402 for FCAN 01 and ABB Drives profile for all fieldbus adapter modules fieldbus adapter module converts the fieldbus specific control word to the FBA communication profile and status word from FBA communication profile to the fieldbus specific status word For descriptions of other profiles see the User s Manual of the appropriate fie
221. ntroller can be used to control process variables such as pressure flow or fluid level In process PID control a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level setpoint The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control Process PID Alt Al2 Process sis actual D2D values FBA For a more detailed block diagram see page 292 B Sleep function for process PID control The following example visualizes the operation of the sleep function The drive controls a pressure boost pump The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the process PID controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor would never stop rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Program features 71 Motor Speed ty Sleep delay 27 24 twq Wake up delay 27 26 Sleep level 27 23 SLEEP MODE STOP START
222. odel can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter E Temperature measurement It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor temperature sensor between 24 V and digital input DI6 of the drive or to optional encoder interface module FEN xx Constant current is fed through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases as the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature Tyer as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage and converts it into ohms Program features 77 The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature PTC resistance It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected For the wiring of the temperature sensor refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive For encoder interface module FEN xx connection see the User s Manual of the encoder interface module B Settings Parameter group 37 Mot therm prot page 177 Timers It is possible to define four different daily or weekly time periods The time periods can be used to control four different timers The on off statuses of the four timers are indicated by bits 0 3 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat from where the signal can be connected to any parameter with a bit pointer setting see page 93 In addition bit
223. oint and 10 1 unit feedback 04 05 Process PID out Output of the process PID controller 10 1 unit 04 06 Process var1 Process variable 1 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 07 Process var2 Process variable 2 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 08 Process var3 Process variable 3 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 09 Counter ontime1 Reading of on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 121s func 04 10 Counter ontime2 Reading of on time counter 2 See parameter group 44 05 1 1s Ontime2 func 04 11 Counter edge1 Reading of rising edge counter 1 See parameter group 44 09 1 1 Edge count func 04 12 Counter edge2 Reading of rising edge counter 2 See parameter group 44 14 1 1 Edge count2 func 04 13 Counter value1 Reading of value counter 1 See parameter group 44 19 Val 1 1 count1 func 04 14 Counter value2 Reading of value counter 2 See parameter group 44 24 Val 1 1 count2 func Parameters 103 06 Drive status Drive status words 06 01 Status word1 Status word 1 sent to the master Name ntormati n O Ready Enabled starea Running Em of Em stop of Ack startinh 11 Start inhibit is active Edi Start inhibit is inactive Alarm EXEZ act 0 Fieldbus local control is inactive 1 Fault 1 Fault is active See chapter Fault tracing 0 No fault is active 11 Local panel 1 Local control is active ie drive is controlled
224. ointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 04 Ext2 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 2 EXT2 Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running No start or stop command sources selected In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1 parameter 10 05 Ext2 start in1 The state transitions of the Source bit are interpreted as follows 3 The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10 05 Ext2 start in1 and 10 06 Ext2 start in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows 170 The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus Parameters 111 D2D The start and stop commands are taken from another drive through the D2D Drive to drive Control Word In1F In2R The source selected by 10 05 Ext2 start in1 is the forward 5 start signal the source selected by 10 06 Ext2 start in2 is the reverse start signal tate of source tate of source 2 via par 10 05 via par 10 06 penom 1 Pee In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10 05 Ext2 start in1 is the start signal 0 stop 1 start the source selected by 10 06 Ext2 start in2is the direction signal 0 7 forward 1 7 reverse 10 05 0 start in1 Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2 See parameter 10 04 Ext2 start func selections n1 and 3 wire Note This para
225. om line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Wc 16 The ACS850 control panel B Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive 00 4 da 3 4 No Foa Significance Dotted rotating Drive is running but not at reference arrow Stationary arrow Drive i
226. on a fieldbus func 1 Fault communication break 2 Spd ref Safe 3 Last speed 50 03 Comm loss t 0 3 6553 5 s Defines the time between communication out break detection and the action selected with parameter 50 02 Comm loss func 50 04 Fba ref1 0 Raw data Defines the fieldbus reference scaling modesel and 50 05 1 Torque When Raw data is selected see also Fba ref2 modesel 2 Speed parameters 50 06 50 11 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION see also page 216 51 01 FBA type Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module 51 02 FBA par2 These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used 51 27 FBA par 0 Done Validates any changed adapter module refresh 1 Refresh configuration parameter settings 51 28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 51 29 Drive type Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus code adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 280 Fieldbus control Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 51 30 Mapping file Displays the fieldbus adapter module ver mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive 51 31 D2FBA comm Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter sta module communication 51 32 FBA comm Displays the commo
227. on of fault 0039 ENCODER1 for more information Check the settings of parameters 57 01 and 57 15 Ensure that the FSCA module has been detected by checking parameters 09 20 09 22 Check that the FSCA module is correctly wired Try installing the FSCA module into another slot If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 06 Mot temp2 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor cable Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 40 C 104 F ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 275 Code Fault Cause What to do fiel
228. on of the ACS850 control panel The control panel can be used to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters Features e alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock 14 The ACS850 control panel Installation E Mechanical installation For mounting options see the Hardware Manual of the drive Instructions for mounting the control panel onto a cabinet door are available in ACS CP U Control Panel IP54 Mounting Platform Kit Installation Guide 3AUA0000049072 English B Electrical installation Use a CAT5 straight through network cable with a maximum length of 3 meters Suitable cables are available from ABB For the control panel connector location on the drive see the Hardware Manual of the drive The ACS850 control panel 15 Layout 49 10 uz 0 504 10 7 x 00 00 MENU Status LED Green for normal operation LCD display Divided into three main areas Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 16 Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms Bott
229. on time for acceleration deceleration compensation In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 23 03 Derivation time Note As a general rule set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed Acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed 0 00 600 00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time 100 15 23 06 Acc comp Ftime 0 0 1000 0 ms Defines the derivation filter time constant for the acceleration deceleration compensation See parameters 23 03 Derivation time and 23 05 Acc comp DerTime Note This parameter is automatically set by the speed controller autotune function when performed in User mode See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode Derivation filter time constant for acceleration compensation 162 Parameters 23 07 Speed err Ftime Defines the time constant of the speed error low pass filter If the used speed reference changes rapidly like in a servo application the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter Reducing the ripple wi
230. ong enough WARNING The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases It includes the flying start function starting to a rotating machine and the automatic restart function a stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions Note If parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default 11 02 Dc magn time Defines the constant DC magnetizing time See parameter 11 01 Start mode After the start command the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor the set time To ensure full magnetizing set this value to the same value as or higher than the rotor time constant If not known use the rule of thumb value given in the table below 200 to 1000 kW gt 1000 to 2000 ms Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time Parameters 117 11 03 Stop mode Selects the motor stop function Coast Stop by cutting of the motor powe
231. onnected to drive motor connection The drive trips on fault CABLE CROSS CON 30 09 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition The protection wakes up if the drive is at stall current limit defined by parameter 30 10 Stall curr lim or 06 05 Limit word1 differs from 0 the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30 11 Stall freq hi and the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30 12 Stall time See section Stall protection parameters 30 09 30 12 on page 73 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Supervision enabled Ena warn Enable warning 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates an alarm upon a stall condition 1 Enabled Drive trips on a fault upon a stall condition bu AAA S O motor See parameter 30 09 Stall function Parameters 177 31 Mot therm prot Motor temperature measurement and thermal protection settings 31 01 Mot temp1 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor thermal protection 1 Motor thermal protection 1 inactive The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE when the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Fault The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE or trips on fault MOTOR OVERTEMP when the temperature exceeds the alarm fault level defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim 1 31 04 Mot temp1 fltLim whichever is
232. ontrol Word CW References Process I O cyclic Status Word SW 9 Actual values gt Parameter R W requests responses Process I O cyclic or b Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed betvveen the fieldbus interface and other available sources for example digital and analogue inputs Fieldbus adapters are available for various serial communication protocols for example PROFIBUS DP FPBA xx adapter e CANopen FCAN xx adapter DeviceNet FDNA xx adapter 2 LoNWonks FLON xx adapter Fieldbus control 279 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting parameter 50 07 Fba enable to Enable The adapter specific parameters must also be set See the table below Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION AND SUPERVISION see also page 274 50 01 Fba enable 1 Enable Initialises communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module 50 02 Comm loss 0 No Selects how the drive reacts up
233. opped E Supply phase loss detection parameter 30 06 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected E Safe Torque Off detection parameter 30 07 The drive monitors the status of the Safe Torque Off input For more information on the Safe Torque Off function see the Hardware Manual of the drive B Switched supply and motor cabling parameter 30 08 The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been switched for example if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not B Stall protection parameters 30 09 30 12 The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits torque frequency and time and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition 74 Program features Scalar motor control It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of Direct Torque Control DTC In scalar control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference However the outstanding performance of DTC is not achieved in scalar control It is recommended to activate the scalar motor control mode in the following situations e In multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification ID run e Ifth
234. or correctly the motor The settings of drive to drive Check the settings of the parameters in link configuration parameters group 57 D2D communication group 57 are incompatible Fault tracing 265 Code Alarm Cause What to do fieldbus code 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 STALL 0x7121 Programmable fault 30 09 Stall function LCURVE 0x2312 Programmable fault 34 01 Overload func 34 02 Underload func LCURVE PAR 0x6320 FLUX REF PAR 0x6320 SPEED FEEDBACK 0x8480 OPTION COMM LOSS 0x7000 MOTTEMPAL2 0x4313 Programmable fault 31 05 Mot temp2 prot IGBTOLALARM 0x5482 IGBTTEMPALARM 0x4210 Motor is operating in stall region because of e g excessive load or insufficient motor power Overload or underload limit has been exceeded The load curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined The U f voltage frequency curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined No speed feedback is received Communication between drive and option module FEN xx and or FIO xx is lost Estimated motor temperature based on motor thermal model has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature This alarm protects the IGBT s and can be activated by a short circuit i
235. or 1 of one bit in a 32 bit signal The first bit from the left is bit number 31 and the first bit from the right is bit number 0 Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the LOC x MAIN MENU Output mode Othervvise press EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS LOC U PAR GROUPS 01 on the menu with keys LA and Cw_ and pressing 1 Actual values EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys CAN and 2 Here the bit pointer parameter 10 02 Ext1 To TIS cT s LO start in1 is used as an example 11 Sta rt stop mode 12 Operating mode 13 Analogue inputs 14 Digital 1 0 EXIT Press lt to select the appropriate parameter group LOC 1 PARAMETERS Current value of each parameter is shown below its 1001 Extl start func name In 1002 Extl start inl 1003 Extl start in2 1004 Ext2 start func EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the parameter 10 02 start in with keys LOC t PARAMETERS CA and Cw 1001 Extl start func 1002 Extl start inl DI1 1003 Extl start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func EXIT 00 00 EDIT Press s LOC UY PAR EDIT 1002 Ext1 start inl P 02 01 00 CANCEL 00 00 SEL The ACS850 control panel 27 Specify a new value with keys A and SV The text below the cursor shows the corresponding parameter group index and bit Press lt to accept an
236. or pull out limit is active i e the motor out cannot produce more torque 7 Reserved AAA Thermal T Imputcurentis limited by main crout thermal imt lt Max current 1 Inverter maximum output current limit is active limits the drive output Au Imax User cur Maximum inverter output current limit is active The limit is defined by rent parameter 20 05 Maximum current Pleat Calculated thermal current value limits the inverter output current IGBT One of bits 0 3 can be on simultaneously The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first Only one of bits 9 11 can be on simultaneously The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first Op mode ack Operation mode acknowledge 0 Stopped 1 Speed 2 Torque 3 Min 4 Max 5 Add 10 Scalar 11 Forced Magn i e DC Hold Superv status Supervision status word Bits 0 2 reflect the status of supervisory functions 1 3 respectively The functions are configured in parameter group 33 Supervision page 183 Timed func stat Bits 0 3 show the on off status of the four timers 1 4 respectively configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions Bit 4 is on if any one of the four timers is on Counter status Counter status word Shows whether the maintenance counters configured in parameter group 44 Maintenance have exceeded their limits Name lnformation On time counter 1 has reached its preset limit On time c
237. osing the fault press EZ LOCU Check parameter 30 0 3 Local ctrl loss se tting Check PC tool or panel connection EXIT OK Press The panel allows you to edit necessary parameters to correct the fault Specify a new value for the parameter with keys AS and 2 SA To accept the new value press To cancel the new value and keep the original press VE How to reset faults When a fault occurs a text identifying the fault is shown SET To reset the fault press L EXIT To return to the previous display press EZ The ACS850 control panel 35 LOC UPAR EDIT 3003 Local ctrl loss Fault 1 EXIT 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3003 Local ctrl loss Spd ref safe 2 EXIT 00 00 SAVE LOC FAULT FAULT 36 LOCAL CTRL LOSS RESET EXIT 36 The ACS850 control panel B Time Date In the Time amp Date option you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats e set the date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you
238. ounter 2 has reached its preset limit Rising edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit Rising edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit 08 Alarms amp faults Alarm and fault information ERES 08 01 Active fault Fault code of the latest fault 08 02 Last fault Fault code of the 2nd latest fault Parameters 107 08 03 Fault time hi Time real time or power on time at which the active fault 1 1d occurred in format dd mm yy day month and year 08 04 Fault time lo Time real time or power on time at which the active fault occurred in format hh mm ss hours minutes and seconds 08 05 Alarm word1 Alarm word 1 For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Brake start torq Brake not closed Brake not open afe torq off to mode Motor temp Em off Run enable Id run H0 Position sealing HT Brovremp CS 122 ECigbt verl mp 0 H3 Device overtemp A Int board ovtemp 15 BC mod overtemp Alarm word2 Alarm word 2 For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Name 4 b rise m 4 e Emodr 680 aane 8989060 1 Latch pos1 9 anp 086 oo 5 TT FENfempmes 13 108 Parameters 08 07 Alarm word3 Alarm word 3 For possible causes and remedies see chapter Fault tracing Bt Name 0 806 9 Motornomvauqs 806 Tj 680
239. ower unit of the drive Temperature of internal AC choke excessive Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual Contact your local ABB representative Let drive cool down Let drive cool down Try other autophasing modes see parameter 11 07 Autophasing mode if possible Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Check cooling fan Fault tracing 271 Code Fault Cause What to do fieldbus code 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 EXTERNAL 0x9000 SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A Programmable fault Programmable fault 30 07 Sto diagnostic OVERSPEED 0x7310 BRAKE START TORQUE 0x7185 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func BRAKE NOT CLOSED 0x7186 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func BRAKE NOT OPEN 0x7187 Programmable fault 42 12 Brake fault func LOCAL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 Programmable fault 30 03 Local ctrl loss NVMEM CORRUPTED 0x6320 OPTIONCOMM LOSS 0x7000 Fault in external device This information is configured through one of programmable digital inputs Safe
240. parameter 16 17 Power unit or hp 01 24 kWh inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive in either 1 1 kWh direction in kilowatt hours 01 25 kWh supply Amount of energy that the drive has taken from the AC supply 1 1 kWh in kilowatt hours 01 26 On time counter On time counter The counter runs when the drive is 1 1h powered Can be reset using the DriveStudio PC tool Parameters 95 01 27 Run time counter Motor run time counter The counter runs when the inverter 1 1h modulates Can be reset using the DriveStudio PC tool 01 28 Fan on time Running time of the drive cooling fan Can be reset by 1 1h entering 0 01 29 Torq nom scale Nominal torque which corresponds to 100 1000 Note This value is copied from parameter 99 12 Mot nom 1 Nem torque if entered Otherwise the value is calculated 01 30 Polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor 01 31 Mech time const Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as 1000 1 s determined by the speed controller autotune function See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode on page 165 01 32 Temp phase A Measured temperature of phase U power stage in percent of 10 196 fault limit 01 33 Temp phase B Measured temperature of phase V power stage in percent of 10 196 fault limit 01 34 Temp phase C Measured temperature of phase W power stage in percent 10 196 below fault limit 01 35 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct on lin
241. peed is within the limits defined by this parameter signal 02 24 FBA main sw bit 8 AT SETPOINT is 1 If the motor speed is not within the defined limits bit 8 is O 0 30000 rpm Absolute value for motor speed window supervision MN tuning on page 74 2001 Maximum speed Haes te alowed maxmum speed f 2002 Minimum speed Define te alowed minimum sped J Parameters 151 20 03 Pos speed ena Selects the source of the positive speed reference enable command 1 Positive speed reference is enabled 0 Positive speed reference is interpreted as zero speed reference In the figure below 03 03 SpeedRef unramp is set to zero after the positive speed enable signal has cleared Actions in different control modes Speed control Speed reference is set to zero and the motor is stopped along the currently active deceleration ramp Torque control Torque limit is set to zero and the rush controller stops the motor 20 03 Pos speed ena 20 04 Neg speed ena l 03 03 SpeedRef unramp 01 08 Encoder1 speed Example The motor is rotating in the forward direction To stop the motor the positive speed enable signal is deactivated by a hardware limit switch e g via digital input If the positive speed enable signal remains deactivated and the negative speed enable signal is active only reverse rotation of the motor is allowed Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 S O comma
242. pervision enabled Input value sel Input value selection 0 Current Current is supervised 1 Torque Torque is supervised Ena warn Enable warning 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates an alarm when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34 20 Underload time 1 Enabled Drive trips on a fault when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34 20 Underload time Drive output frequency at point 1 of user load curve Frequency at point 1 Drive output frequency at point 2 of user load curve Frequency at point 2 Drive output frequency at point 3 of user load curve Frequency at point 3 Drive output frequency at point 4 of user load curve Frequency at point 4 Drive output frequency at point 5 of user load curve Frequency at point 5 0 0 34 08 Load low lim1 Minimum load current or torque at point 1 of user load curve 1600 Minimum load at point 1 34 09 Load low lim2 Minimum load current or torque at point 2 of user load curve 1600 Minimum load at point 2 0 1600 Minimum load at point 3 34 11 Load low lim4 Minimum load current or torque at point 4 of user load curve 0 160096 Minimum load at point 4 34 12 Load low lim5 Minimum load current or torque at point 5 of user load curve 0 160096 Minimum load at point 5 34 13 Load high lim1 Maximum load current or torque at point 1 of user load cu
243. play If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys CAS and Kw After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing EZ If the power is switched on switch it off If the panel cable can be disconnected easily unplug the panel cable from the control panel OR if the panel cable can not be disconnected easily switch off the control board or the drive Keep key depressed while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel SW Panel firmware version ROM CRC Panel ROM check sum Flash Rev Flash content version Flash content comment When you release the 2 key the panel goes to the Output mode LOC t TIME DATE 6 TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE DAYLIGHT SAVING EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC Y HELP Use daylight 5 to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight savin EXIT 00 00 LOC t HELP to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight saving changes EXIT 00 00 LOCU TIME DATE 6 TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE DAYLIGHT SAVING EXIT 00 00 SEL PANEL VERSION INFO Panel Sw X XX ROM CRC XXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 20 The ACS850 control panel B Basic operations Any mode How to start stop and switch
244. pm reference before speed error calculation 100 1 rpm 03 12 Torq ref sp lim Torque reference limited by the rush control value in 10 1 percent Torque is limited to ensure that the speed is between the minimum and maximum speed limits defined by parameters 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed 03 13 Torq ref to TC Torque reference in percent for the torque control 10 1 03 14 Torq ref used Torque reference after frequency voltage and torque limiters 10 1 100 corresponds to the motor nominal torque 03 15 Brake torqmem Torque value in percent stored when the mechanical brake 10 196 close command is issued 1 03 16 Brake command Brake on off command 0 close 1 open For brake on off control connect this signal to a relay output or digital output See section Mechanical brake control on page 66 03 17 Flux ref used Used flux reference in percent 03 18 Speed ref pot Output of the motor potentiometer function The motor 100 1 rpm potentiometer is configured using parameters 21 10 21 12 102 Parameters 04 Appl values Process and counter values 04 01 Process acti Process feedback 1 for the process PID controller 100 1 unit 04 02 Process act2 Process feedback 2 for the process PID controller 100 1 unit 04 03 Process act Final process feedback after process feedback selection and 100 1 unit modification 04 04 Process PID err Process PID error i e difference between PID setp
245. process feedback part turning the Parameters 173 27 15 PID deriv filter Defines the time constant of the 1 pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller 0 Unfiltered signal 100 63 S Filtered signal T OzIx 1 ef filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 27 16 PID error inv PID error inversion When the source selected by this parameter is on the error process setpoint process feedback at the PID controller input is inverted Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 27 17 PID mode Activates the PID controller output trimming function Using the trim it is possible to apply a correction factor to the drive reference Prop speed PID controller output is trimmed in proportion to speed Prop torque PID controller output is trimmed in proportion to torque 27 18 PID maximum Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output Using the minimum and maximum limits it is possible to restrict the operation range 32768 0 Maximum limit for PID controller output 32768 0 27 19 PID minimum Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output See parameter 27 18 PID maximum 32768 0 Minimum limit for PID controller output 32768 0 27 22 Sleep mode Activates the sleep function Sleep function inactive Internal The sleep function is activated and deactivated automatically as defined
246. ption by selecting PARAMETERS LOC t PAR GROUPS 01 on the menu with keys C A and SY 7 and pressing Select the appropriate parameter group with keys A 2 LOC 1 PAR GROUPS 99 99 Start up data 01 Actual values values 00 00 SEL LOC t PARAMETERS 9901 Language English 9904 Motor type 9905 Motor ctrl mode 9906 Mot nom current EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys 4 7 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter Here the parameter 99 06 Mot nom current is used as an example 9906 Mot nom current 0 0 A EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 9906 Mot nom NO R A CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 24 The ACS850 control panel Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A LOC UPAR EDIT and Cw Pressing an arrow key once increments or decrements 9906 Mot nom current the value Keeping the key depressed for a while first quickly changes the current digit until the cursor moves left one position This is repeated until the key is released CANCEL 00 00 SAVE After the key is released step by step adjustment of the current digit is possible If neither key is pressed for a while the cursor returns to the right one position at a time Pressing both keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value VE To save the new value press x LOC S PARAMETERS Jo cancel the new value and keep th
247. r correspond to the following functions Timed func2 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 2 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 2 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Timer ena Time period 1 enable Timer2 ena Time period 2 enable Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable Timer4 ena Time period 4 enable Boost ena Boost enable Parameters 199 36 23 Timed func3 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 3 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 3 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Timer1 ena Time period 1 enable 1 Timer2 ena Time period 2 enable 2 Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable 5 Timer ena Time period 4 enable 4 Boost ena Boost enable 36 24 Timed func4 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 4 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 4 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functio
248. r input TH PTC ist FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 1 is used for the temperature supervision PTC 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor connected to encoder interface module FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 If two encoder interface modules are used encoder module connected to Slot 2 is used for the temperature supervision Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output Al1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive 180 Parameters Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available ana
249. r is defined by parameters 52 01 FBA data in1 52 12 FBA data in12 The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53 01 FBA data out 53 12 FBA data out12 Fieldbus network Fieldbus adapter FBA Profile EXT1 2 NN P FBA MAIN CW 4 FBA REF REF1 DATA OUT 10 01 selection 10 04 Speed Torque REF1 sel 2 Par 10 01 99 99 Group 53 FBA MAIN SW FBA ACT1 21 01 24 01 24 02 Fieldbus specific interface DATA IN selection 2 Par 01 01 99 99 Cyclic communication Group 52 Acyclic communication See the manual of the fieldbus Speed Torque REF2 sel 21 02 24 01 24 02 Parameter adapter module table 1 See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus 2 The maximum number of used data words is protocol dependent 3 Profile instance selection parameters Fieldbus module specific parameters For more information see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 4 With DeviceNet the control part is transmitted directly 5 With DeviceNet the actual value part is transmitted directly Fieldbus control 283 B The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Co
250. r supply The motor coasts to a stop WARNING If the mechanical brake is used A ensure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting Ramp Stop along ramp See parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp on page 155 1 11 04 Dc hold speed Defines the DC hold speed See parameter 11 06 Dc hold 0 0 1000 0 rpm DC hold speed 10 1 rpm 11 05 Dc hold curr ref Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal current See parameter 11 06 Dc hold 0 100 DC hold current 1 1 Disabled The DC hold function is disabled Enabled The DC hold function is enabled 1 11 07 Autophasing mode Selects the way autophasing is performed during the ID run See section Autophasing on page 58 11 06 Dc hold Enables the DC hold function The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter 11 04 Dc hold speed the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 11 05 Dc hold curr ref When the reference speed exceeds parameter 11 04 Dc hold speed normal drive operation continues DC hold Motor speed Reference 11 04 Dc hold speed Notes The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off The DC hold function can only be activated in speed control mode The DC hold function cannot be activated if parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar Injecti
251. rake close speed 42 05 Close speed AND close command delay 42 06 Close cmd delay has elapsed Brake is closed acknowledgement 0 AND brake close delay 42 04 Close delay has elapsed Start 0 Start 1 AND brake open request is on source selected by 42 10 Brake close req is 0 AND reopen delay has elapsed Brake is open acknowledgement 1 AND brake close delay has elapsed Defined starting torque at brake release is not reached Brake is closed acknowledgement 0 AND brake open delay has elapsed Brake is closed acknowledgement 0 Brake is open acknowledgement 1 AND brake close delay has elapsed Fault is generated after brake close fault delay 42 13 Close flt delay has elapsed 68 Program features Operation time scheme The simplified time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function Start cmd Ramp input P Modulating zd xpo dii 7 Ref Running EB uc M 1 Kg thea Brake open a I 01 T Start torque at brake release parameter 42 08 Brake open torq Tmem Stored torque value at brake close signal 03 15 Brake torq mem tma Motor magnetising delay toa Brake open delay parameter 42 03 Open delay Nes Brake close speed parameter 42 05 Close speed leed Brake close command delay parameter 42 06 Close cmd delay ted Brake close delay parameter 42 04 Close delay Example The figure below shows a brake control application example control fun
252. rameter 44 02 Ontime1 src is on After the limit set by parameter 44 03 Ontime1 limit is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 04 Ontime1 alm sel is given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04 09 Counter ontime1 Bit O of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 02 1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 E HT 44 03 Ontime1 limit Sets the alarm limit for on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func 0 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on time counter 1 44 04 Ontime1 alm sel Selects the alarm for on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime 1 func Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 1 206 Parameters 44 05 Ontime2 func Configures on time counter 2 This counter runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 44 06 Ontime2 src is on After the limit set by parameter 44 07 Ontime2 limit is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 08 Ontime2 alm sel is given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable fro
253. rce 2 via par 10 02 SEA ESE AP PO O matrvese d lh Pop In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10 02 Ext1 start in7 is the start signal 0 stop 1 start the source selected by 10 03 Ext1 start in2 is the direction signal 0 forward 1 reverse 110 Parameters 10 02 Ext1 start in1 Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1 See parameter 10 01 Ext start func selections n1 and 3 wire Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI6 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 5 1074070017 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat The bit is on when 1074005518 at least one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on Constant and bit pointer settings see Terms and AE 10 03 Ext1 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1 See parameter 10 01 Ext1 start func selection 3 wire Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 IT Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Bit p
254. re last reset 00 00 00 Last reset time of loggers 1 1s 23 59 59 64 14 AL10 to 10 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10 100 1 64 15 AL1 10 to 20 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 10 and 20 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20 100 1 64 16 AL1 20 to 30 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 20 and 30 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30 100 1 64 17 AL1 30 to 40 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 30 and 4096 0 00 100 0096 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40 100 1 64 18 AL1 40 to 50 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 40 and 50 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50 100 1 64 19 AL1 50 to 60 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 50 and 60 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60 100 1 64 20 AL1 60 to 70 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 60 and 70 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70 100 1 Parameters 223 64 21 AL1 70 to 80 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 70 and 80 0 00 100 00
255. re Manual 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 1073742082 01 04 Motor current see page 94 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 01 23 Motor power see page 94 1073742103 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 64 05 AL signal base Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100 amplitude 0 00 32768 00 Signal value corresponding to 100 222 Parameters 64 06 PVL peak value Peak value recorded by the peak value logger Ilic 32768 00 Peak value 100 2 1 32768 00 64 07 Date of peak The date on which the peak value was recorded f 01 01 80 Peak occurrence date dd mm yy 64 08 Time of peak The time at which the peak value was recorded rd 1 1s 00 00 00 Peak occurrence time 23 59 59 64 09 Current at peak Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded fl 32768 00 Motor current at peak 100 1A 32768 00 A 64 10 Dc volt at peak Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the moment the peak value was recorded 0 00 2000 00 V DC voltage at peak 100 1V 64 11 Speed at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded 1 32768 00 Motor speed at peak 100 1 rpm 32768 00 rpm 64 12 Date of reset The date the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were last reset 01 01 80 Last reset date of loggers dd mm yy 64 13 Time of reset The time the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 we
256. reviations on page 93 Pointer when 14 22 DIO6 conf is set to Output Enabled Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073808897 Started Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073874433 Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073939969 S ma Zero speed Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 105 1073808899 Supervision1 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073743373 Supervision2 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073808909 Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer when 14 26 DIO7 conf is set to Output Enabled Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073808897 132 Parameters Wo Wameivaiue Deseripion 0808080 Yun O Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word see page 103 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 Supervision Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073743373 Supervision2 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073808909 Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 106 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Pointer 14 30 DIO8 conf Selects whether DIO8 is used as a digital output or input Output DIO8 is used as a digital output DIO8 is used as a digital input 14 31 DIO8 out
257. revious 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case of a communication break 50 03 Comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter 50 02 Comm loss func is taken Time count starts when the link fails to update the message 0 3 6553 5 s Time delay 50 04 Eba reri modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF1 scaling and the actual value which is sent to the fieldbus FBA ACT1 1 3 Parameters 215 Raw data No scaling i e data is transmitted without scaling Source for the actual value which is sent to the fieldbus is selected by parameter 50 06 Fba act1 tr src Torque Fieldbus adapter module uses torque reference scaling 1 Torque reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus profile e g with ABB Drives Profile integer value 10000 corresponds to 10096 torque value Signal 01 06 Motor torque is sent to the fieldbus as an actual value See the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module Speed Fieldbus adapter module uses speed reference scaling 2 Speed reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus profile e g with ABB Drives Profile integer value 20000 corresponds to parameter 19 01 Speed scaling value Signal 01 01 Motor speed rpm is sent to the fieldbus as an actual value See the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 1 50 05 Fba ref2 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF2 scaling See paramet
258. rn to the parameters list The new value is shown in the parameters list To freely define an analog signal as the value choose Pointer and press x The parameter group and index will be shown Select the parameter group with As and SY 2 The text below the cursor displays the currently selected parameter group Press y to select the parameter index Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting To save the new value for the pointer parameter press WM The new value is shown in the parameters list The ACS850 control panel 25 LOC t PARAMETERS __ 2101 Speed refl sel AI2 scaled 2103 Speed refl1 func 2104 Speed ref1 2 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC t PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel AIl scaled P 02 05 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC 6 PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel FBA rerl P 02 26 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC t PARAMETERS 2101 Speed refl sel f1 2104 Speed ref1 2 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC t PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel 02 I O values CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel P 02 0n 0207 AI2 scaled CANCEL 00 00 SAVE PARAMETERS 2101 Speed refl sel AI2 scaled 26 The ACS850 control panel How to change the value of bit pointer parameters The bit pointer parameter points to the value of a bit in another signal or can be fixed to 0 FALSE or 1 TRUE For the latter option see page 28 A bit pointer parameter points to a bit value 0
259. rresponds to actual encoder interface 1 FEN xx installed in drive Slot 1 2 parameter 09 20 Option slot 09 21 Option slot2 Note The new setting will only take effect after parameter 90 10 Enc par refresh is used or after the JCU Control Unit is powered up the next time Check that parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src 31 06 Mot temp2 src setting corresponds to actual encoder interface installation 09 20 Option slot1 09 21 Option slot2 If one FEN xx module is used Parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src 31 06 Mot temp2 src must be set either to KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN The FEN xx module can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 If two FEN xx modules are used When parameter 31 02 Mot temp src 31 06 Mot temp2 src is set to KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN the encoder installed in drive Slot 1 is used When parameter 31 02 Mot temp src 31 06 Mot temp2 src is set to KTY 2nd FEN or PTC 2nd FEN the encoder installed in drive Slot 2 is used FEN 01 does not support temperature measurement with KTY sensor Use PTC sensor or other encoder interface module Check cable between resolver and resolver interface module FEN 21 and order of connector signal wires at both ends of cable Check resolver parameter settings For resolver parameters and information see parameter group 92 Resolver conf Note Resolver autotuning routines should always be performed after resolver cable connection has been modified Autotuning routines can
260. rse 1 For example if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative the drive will run in the forward direction 0 Accord Par The running direction for the constant speed Is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 26 06 26 12 26 02 Const speed sel1 When bit O of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is O Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 1 When bit O of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 26 03 Const speed sel2 and 26 04 Const speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows by par 26 02 by par 26 0 by par 26 04 0 None 0 Constamtspeedt 0 Constantspeed2 0 Constant speeds Constant speed 7 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 E pol uj Wl el Parameters 169 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 26 03 Const speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 0 Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 2 When bit O of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 26 02 Const speed sel1 and 26 04 Const speed sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 26 02 Const speed sel1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 D
261. rve 0 160096 Maximum load at point 1 34 10 Load low lim3 Minimum load current or torque at point 3 of user load curve 188 Parameters 34 14 Load high lim2 Maximum load current or torque at point 2 of user load curve 160096 Maximum load at point 2 34 15 Load high lim3 Maximum load current or torque at point 3 of user load curve 0 160096 Maximum load at point 3 34 16 Load high lim4 Maximum load current or torque at point 4 of user load 7 curve 0 160096 Maximum load at point 4 34 17 Load high lim5 Maximum load current or torque at point 5 of user load curve 0 160096 Maximum load at point 5 34 18 Load integ time Integration time used in limit supervision whenever enabled by parameter 34 01 34 02 0 10000 s Integration time 34 19 Load cool time Defines the cooling time The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if the load stays continuously below the upper boundary of the user load curve 10000 s Load cooling time 0 34 20 Underload time Time for the underload function See parameter 34 02 Underload func 0 10000 5 Underload time 35 Process variable Selection and modification of process variables for display as parameters 04 06 04 08 35 01 Signal param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 06 Process EE var1 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 94 01 02 Motor speed see page 94 Value pointer setting see T
262. s inductance Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 Direct axis inductance in per unit 100000 10 00000 p u 1 p u 97 07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 Quadrature axis inductance in per unit 100000 10 00000 p u 1 p u Parameters 231 97 08 Pm flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 2 00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit 100000 p u 1 p u 97 09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance Rg of the motor model 0 00000 Stator resistance 100000 100 00000 ohm 1 ohm 97 10 Rruser Sl Defines the rotor resistance Rp of the motor model Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 Rotor resistance 100000 100 00000 ohm 1 ohm 97 11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance Ly of the motor model Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00 100000 00 Main inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 12 SigL user SI Defines the leakage inductance Ota Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00 100000 00 1 Leakage inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis synchronous inductance Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00 100000 00 Direct axis inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 14 Lquser SI De
263. s active Controlled through selected digital relay output with signal 03 16 Brake command X Program features 67 1 Forced start inverter is modulating The function keeps the internal start command on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external stop command Effective only when ramp stop has been selected as the stop mode 11 03 Stop mode Run enable and faults override the forced start 0 No forced start normal operation 1 Drive control mode is forced to speed scalar 1 Ramp generator output is forced to zero 0 Ramp generator output is enabled normal operation State change conditions Symbol mmm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Brake control is active 42 01 Brake ctrl With ack or No ack OR modulation of the drive is requested to stop The drive control mode is forced to speed scalar External start command is on AND brake open request is on source selected by 42 10 Brake close req is 0 AND reopen delay 42 07 Reopen delay has elapsed Starting torque required at brake release is reached 42 08 Brake open torq AND brake hold is not active 42 11 Brake hold open Note With scalar control the defined starting torque has no effect Brake is open acknowledgement source selected by par 42 02 Brake acknowl is 1 AND the brake open delay has elapsed 42 03 Open delay Start 1 Start 0 OR brake close command is active AND actual motor speed lt b
264. s feedback 2 100 32768 00 27 08 PID fbk2 min Minimum value for process feedback 2 32768 00 Minimum value for process feedback 2 100 1 32768 00 27 09 fbk gain Multiplier for scaling the final feedback value for process PID controller 32 768 32 767 PID feedback gain 1000 1 1 172 Parameters 27 10 fbk ftime Defines the time constant for the filter through which the process feedback is connected to the PID controller 0 000 30 000 5 Filter time constant Unfiltered signal Filtered signal T OzIx 1 ef filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 27 12 PID gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller See parameter 27 13 PID integ time 0 00 100 00 Gain for PID controller 27 13 PID integ time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller Error Controller output controller input error O controller output G gain Ti 7 integration time Note Setting this value to 0 disables the I PID controller into a PD controller 0 00 320 00 s Integration time 27 14 PID deriv time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values Ex 4 and Ex according to the following formula PID DERIV TIME x Ex Ex 4 Ts in which Ts 12 ms sample time E Error Process reference
265. s in a multicast message chain see parameter 57 11 Ref1 msg type Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page EE 93 57 11 Refi msg type By default in drive to drive communication the master broadcasts the drive to drive control word and references 1 and 2 to all followers This parameter enables multicasting i e sending the drive to drive control word and reference 1 to a certain drive or group of drives The message can then be further relayed to another group of drives to form a multicast chain In the master as well as any intermediate followers i e followers relaying the message to other followers the sources for the control word and reference 1 are selected by parameters 57 08 Follower cw src and 57 06 Ref 1 src respectively Note Reference 2 is broadcast to all followers 220 Parameters Broadcast The control word and reference 1 are sent by the master to all followers If the master has this setting the parameter has no effect in the followers Ref1 MC Grps The drive to drive control word and reference 1 are only sent to the drives in the multicast group specified by parameter 57 13 Next ref1 mc grp This setting can also used in intermediate followers to form a multicast chain 57 12 Refi mc group Selects the multicast group the drive belongs to See parameter 57 11 Ref1 msg type 57 13 Next ref1 mc grp Specifies the next multicast group of drives the multicast message is relayed to See par
266. s stopped Dotted stationary Start command is present but the motor is not running arrow e g because start enable signal is missing Panel operation mode Name of the current mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state e g REF EDIT Reference value or Reference value in the Output mode number of the Number of the highlighted item e g mode parameter selected item group or fault The ACS850 control panel 17 Operating instructions E Basics of operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by entering the MENU state using soft key 2 and then by scrolling the A and SY 2 arrow keys until the option is highlighted and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Control Panel has ten options in the Main menu Parameters Assistants Changed Par Fault Logger Time amp Date Parameter Backup I O Settings Reference Edit Drive Info and Parameter Change Log In addition the control panel has an Output mode which is used as default Also when a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mod
267. speed see page 94 01 04 Motor current see page 94 Current 01 05 Motor current see page 94 1073742085 Parameters 221 01 06 Motor torque see page 94 1073742086 Dc voltage 01 07 Dc voltage see page 94 1073742087 01 22 Power inu out see page 94 1073742102 04 03 Process act see page 102 1073742851 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 64 02 PVL filt time Peak value logger filtering time See parameter 64 01 PVL signal amplitude logger 2 Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 64 04 AL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2 The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running The results are displayed by parameters 64 24 64 33 Each parameter represents an amplitude range and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range The signal value corresponding to 100 is defined by parameter 64 05 AL signal base Parameter 64 03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64 13 Note Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current 01 04 Motor current The results are displayed by parameters 64 14 64 23 10096 of the signal value corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive see the appropriate Hardwa
268. ssing mains phase blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Fan is not able to rotate freely or fan is disconnected Fan operation is monitored by measuring fan current Drive temperature based on thermal model has exceeded internal fault limit Brake resistor short circuit or brake chopper control fault Check motor load Check acceleration times in parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp Check motor and motor cable including phasing and delta star connection Check that the start up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check encoder cable including phasing Check that overvoltage controller is on parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl Check mains for static or transient overvoltage Check brake chopper and resistor if used Check deceleration time Use coast to stop function if applicable Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor Check motor and motor cable Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check mains supply and fuses Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables measure insulation resistances of motor
269. t DI3 Digital input 014 Digital input DI5 DI5 Digital input DI6 or thermistor input Start interlock 0 Stop DIIL DIO1 H DIO2 VRE VRE AGN Al1 Al1 Al2 Al2 gt Digital input output DIO1 Output Ready Digital input output DIO2 Output Running Reference voltage Reference voltage Ground Analog input Al1 Speed reference 1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 m Analog input AI2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 TIF 2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper 2 mE N Al2 current voltage selection jumper AO1 1 AO1 ES moz 3 Analog output AO2 Speed 96 a m z n A02 Drive to drive link termination jumper Beno 3 EUN EN Cor T XX IN1 EN t m a Analog output AO1 Current Drive to drive link H Safe Torque Off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start XSTO Control panel connection Memory unit connection 84 Application macros Hand Auto macro The Hand Auto macro is suited for speed control applications where two external control devices are used The drive is speed controlled from the external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 The selection between the control locations is done through digital input DI3 The start stop signal for EXT1 is connected to DI1 while running direction is determined by DI2 For EXT2 start stop commands are given through DI6 the
270. t values change these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Go to the Main menu by pressing XI if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 utput mode ol press EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys as and NO UY MESSAGE KW and pressing AT If there are no changed parameters in the history corresponding text will be shown If parameters have been changed a list of them is LOC U CHANGED PAR shown Select the changed parameter on the list with 9906 Mot nom current keys A and amp CW 7 The value of the selected 3 5 A parameter is shown below it 9907 Mot nom vo tage 9908 Mot nom f Press X to modify the value LOC UPAR EDIT 9906 Mot nom ips A CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A LOC UPAR EDIT and 2 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 9906 Mot nom current value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed E A value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE The ACS850 control panel 33 SAVE To accept the new value press x f the nevv value is LOC CHANGED PAR the default value the parameter is removed from the list 0006 Mot nom current lo cancel the new value and keep the original press
271. t operational when the drive start command is on or if the drive is in local control Note The ramp shape time is set to zero during jogging Load analyzer E Peak value logger The user can select a signal to be monitored by the peak value logger The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred as well as motor current DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak B Amplitude loggers The drive has two amplitude loggers Program features 65 For amplitude logger 2 the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running and specify a value that corresponds to 100 The collected samples are sorted into 10 read only parameters according to their amplitude Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points wide and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range Percentage of samples 22 as 22 as as 22 as 22 as as o ES ES o un N e Y 9 o rs 00 o T o o o o o o o o A e Ye F c Amplitude ranges parameters 64 24 64 33 Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current and cannot be reset With amplitude logger 1 100 corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive hy Settings Parameter group 64 Load analyzer page 220 Maintenance counters The program has six different maintenance counters that can be configured to generate an alarm when the counter
272. t settings for medium tight operation Tight Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for tight operation User Request speed controller autotune with the settings defined 4 by parameters 23 21 Tune bandwidth and 23 22 Tune damping 23 21 Tune bandwidth Speed controller bandwidth for autotune procedure User mode see parameter 23 20 PI tune mode A larger bandwidth results in more restricted speed controller settings 00 00 2000 00 Tune bandwidth for User autotune mode 100 1 Hz HZ 23 22 Tune damping Speed controller damping for autotune procedure User mode see parameter 23 20 PI tune mode Higher damping results in safer and smoother operation Speed controller damping for User autotune mode 166 Parameters 24 Torque ref Torque reference selection limitation and modification settings Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 24 02 Torq ref add sel Selects the source for the torque reference addition Because the reference is added after the torque reference selection this parameter can be used in speed and torque control modes Note For safety reasons this reference addition is not applied when stop functions are active Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 reference is multiplied by the selected value Torque reference scaling 1000 1 24 06 Torq ramp up Defines the torque reference ramp up time i e the time for the reference
273. ter 33 04 Superv1 lo Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 3 33 02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33 04 Superv1 lo bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must exceed the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi Abs High When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 4 33 02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated To clear the bit the absolute value of the signal must fall below the value of parameter 33 04 Superv1 lo parameter 33 01 Superv1 func 01 05 Motor current see page 94 TorqRef used 03 14 Torq ref used see page 101 1073742606 04 03 Process act see page 102 1073742851 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 SpRef used 03 06 SpeedRef used see page 107 1073742598 184 Parameters 33 03 Superv1 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 1 See parameter 33 01 Superv1 func 32768 00 Upper limit for supervision 1 100 32768 00 33 04 Superv1 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 1 See parameter 33 01 Superv1 func 1 1 32768 00 Lower limit for supervision 1 100 32768 00 33 05 Superv2 func Selects the mode of supervision 2 Disabled Supervision 2 not in use Low When the signal selected by
274. th filter may cause speed controller tuning problems A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another A very long filter time results in unstable control 0 0 1000 0 ms Speed error filtering time constant 0 filtering disabled 23 08 Speed additive Defines a speed reference to be added after ramping Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when stop functions are active eo Z mapoedads n IR 02 26 FBA main ref1 see page 100 D2D ref1 02 32 D2D ref1 see page 107 1073742368 D2D ref2 02 33 D2D ref2 see page 107 1073742369 04 05 Process PID out see page 102 1073742853 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 93 1600 0 1600 0 Maximum speed controller output torque 23 10 Min torq sp ctrl Defines the minimum speed controller output torque 1600 0 1600 0 Minimum speed controller output torque 23 11 SpeedErrwinFunc Enables or disables speed error window control Speed error window control forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive It supervises the speed error value speed reference actual speed In the normal operating range window control keeps the speed controller input at zero The speed controller is evoked only if the speed error exceeds the upper boundary of the window parameter 23 12 SpeedErr win hi or the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the lower boundary of the window 23
275. the signal selected by parameter 15 19 AO4 src that corresponds to the maximum AO4 output value defined by parameter 15 21 AO4 out max laos mA 15 21 15 22 selected by par 15 19 lao4 mA 15 21 Signal real selected by par 15 19 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum 4 output 1000 32768 000 value Parameters 145 15 24 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 19 AO4 src that corresponds to the minimum AO4 output value defined by parameter 15 22 AO4 out min See parameter 15 23 AO4 src max 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO4 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 25 AO ctrl word Defines how a signed source is processed before output Bt Name formation AO1 func AO1 is bipolar 0 AOT is absolute value of source AO2 func 2 is bipolar 0 2 is absolute value of source 16 System Parameter lock parameter restore user parameter sets etc 16 01 Local lock Selects the source for disabling local control Take Release button in the PC tool LOC REM key of the panel 0 7 Local control enabled 1 Local control disabled WARNING Before activating ensure that the N control panel is not needed for stopping the drive Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 16 02 Parameter lock Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents parameter changing
276. time the signal selected by parameter 44 70 Edge count1 src switches on unless a divisor value is applied see parameter 44 12 Edge count div After the limit set by parameter 44 11 Edge count1 lim is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 13 Edg cnt1 alm selis given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04 11 Counter edge1 Bit 2 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 0 Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset 0 Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 10 Edge count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func Relay output RO1 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 0 1073742338 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 103 1073939969 Charged Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 104 1074333186 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 44 11 Edge count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 1 1 44 12 Edge count div Divisor for rising edge counter 1 Determines how many rising edges increment the counter by 1 1 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 1 1 1 44 13 Edg
277. tivate run enable Activate run disable Reset Fault reset if an active fault exists other No action continued If all stop mode bits 2 6 are 0 stop mode is selected by parameter 17 03 Stop mode Coast stop bit 6 overrides the emergency stop bits 2 3 4 Emergency stop overrides normal ramp stop bit 5 a 98 Parameters No Name Value Description R L Ra continued Jogging1 1 Activate Jogging 1 See section Jogging on page 63 0 Jogging 1 disabled Jogging2 1 Activate Jogging 2 See section Jogging on page 63 1008 Jogging 2 disabled E 7 ER Fieldbus control enabled PER Fieldbus control disabled Ramp out 0 eet output of Ramp Function Generator to zero The drive ramps to a stop current and DC voltage limits are in 0 Noacion 600 omm hold 1 H alt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held No action Hd ni ind T JF orce input of Ramp Function Generator to zero No action Ext1 Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2 Switch to external control location EXT1 om startinh 1 Activate start inhibit No start inhibit LL ctl EN local control for Control Word Used when the drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local fieldbus Local fieldbus Transfer to fieldbus local control control through fieldbus Control Word or reference Fieldbus steals the control Panel or PC tool Transfer to
278. trol level 0 7 x Upc 50 V min Undervoltage trip level 0 65 x Upc The intermediate DC circuit is charged over an internal resistor which is bypassed when the correct level 80 of Upc is reached and voltage is stabilized Settings Parameter group 47 Voltage ctrl page 212 E Brake chopper The built in brake chopper of the drive can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating motor When the brake chopper is enabled and a resistor connected the chopper will start conducting when the DC link voltage of the drive reaches 780 V The maximum braking power is achieved at 840 V Settings Parameter group 48 Brake chopper page 212 Drive to drive link The drive to drive link is a daisy chained RS 485 transmission line that allows basic master follower communication with one master drive and multiple followers The wiring of the drive to drive link is presented in the hardware manual of the drive Settings Parameter group 57 D2D communication page 218 62 Program features Emergency stop Note The user is responsible for installing the emergency stop devices and all the additional devices needed for the emergency stop to fulfil the required emergency stop category classes For more information contact your local ABB representative The emergency stop signal is to be connected to the digital input which is selected as the source for the emergency stop activation par 10 13 Em stop off3 or 1
279. ue limits 2 limit E speed exceeds limit RIETI V by parameter 19 08 Above speed lim Actual speed is within the defined limits External control location EXT2 is active sema control location EXT1 is active 77 fb aP Le ieldbus local control is active Fieldbus Fieldbus local control is inactive control is inactive Drive speed is below limit defined by parameter 19 06 Zero speed limit Ext2 act 0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit oe is running in reverse direction Drive is running in forward direction Lc Pp act und P Fault 1 A fault is active See chapter Fault tracing op NM RN INo fault is active Local panel Local control is active i e the drive is controlled from PC tool or control panel Local control is inactive 18 26 Reserved peres ctl 1 IC ontrol Word is requested from fieldbus Control Word is not requested from fieldbus SW B28 NEN control bits unless fixed by the used profile See parameters B29 50 08 50 11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter 30 Sw B30 02 26 FBA main ref Scaled fieldbus reference 1 See parameter 50 04 Fba reri 1 1 modesel 02 27 FBAmain ref2 Scaled fieldbus reference 2 See parameter 50 05 Fba ref2 modesel 02 30 D2D main cw Drive to drive control word received from the master See also actual signal 02 31 D2D follower cw top tart 2 6 Run enable By default
280. ui duce Ebo dabo m oe e dr Erie Pe api Pu ctn ica cea cer 188 ss ste tava Xa Sed AAA EXC CC et 194 Euro MT 199 8 Table of contents 40 Motor COnWOD aui sacar as cO AE AAA d 200 42 Mech brake 201 44 Maintenance uox eaa UR xar ee OER R a AAA OEE OEE acd UR ARCET CORR 205 45 Energy optimising o aou quat abu aure Pa dd EU Ra o RENE cae ees 211 47 Voltage reg A O A II 212 48 Brake CHOPS ai uua qos 77 AR esi AGRO Ua ER C 212 49 Data uu om gi ee cu endi ears 213 JO FEOS raras dotes bars ed dd ida saab da 214 D FBA Settings Rx ROCK RA 216 52 FBA data iN T Cast gA ied a y Pees TR dad ae 217 o OUC ae 217 56 Panel display tenes 217 57 D2D communication 3 cruci d A a oxra e ata 218 64 Load analyzer aio da dcus iu ato pb ACA eas D ORE eee Roi ca 220 90 Enc module sel 224 Si ADSOl BIG OR 225 92 Resolver CONT ell aA ici ind oh He an d a 228 93 Pulse enc conf 228 GONT METTUS 229 95 Hw configuration ME PP in lp is ie 229 97 User motor par occ 230 99 Stal UD Gala 2 32359345 LRL o RC 7 7 231 7 Additional parameter data What this chapter contains v auci SR rod ia A oca RO ROC o d 237 Terms and abbreviations
281. upenrew UTS2 32 mmm ob T T EU 14 Digital I O 1401 oriner mask 1 Pe 16 0000000000 omm 0900000000 laar Tom oa 9 mo ptor so Bier 3 004 p101 Ton Tuz 2 39 s 00s ass porre umma 16 90399 e 00s pao oz ewm 92 omo 207 pioZowse si m r 32 T ra maopen 16 2 39 s 00s rage ore Taf Tur Te 90 399 e 00s laas ew 93 o man orowoutsre Bee 32 Fat pem ewm 3 o As Dios outro Bier pamposme eom 83 om Ref running Additional parameter data 245 Range Default g Factory macro mapom umrs2 0 3 f s 00s reas Roe LT sp Humus Hess ROG sre ETH gt mW qasi Rosse gt Bene 2 Posozo sa rosso ETH gt P0604 raso Freginmax seal REAL 16 saree saree 1460 Freainminseal REM 16 seres seres asr Fregoutwe Walpomer 32 us 1432 rrogourmaxsro REM oee f 399 ass frog same REAL 6 oae o q sr Roese ETH pam Rofse Beme 2 crus 15 Analogue outputs oporse vatpoiner 2 J orm ros pO seme REAL s aasre womo 7506 AOT wemin REAL s aerer 09 morose ame 32 gt gt
282. upervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive 31 03 Mottemp1almLim Defines the alarm limit for motor thermal protection 1 when parameter 31 01 Mot temp7 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault 0 200 Motor overtemperature alarm limit C 31 04 Mot temp1 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 1 when parameter 31 01 Mot temp1 prot is set to Fault C 0 200 Motor overtemperature fault limit 31 05 Mot temp2 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor temperature protection 2 Motor temperature protection 2 inactive The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 when the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim Fault The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 or trips on fault MOTTEMP2 when the temperature exceeds the alarm fault level defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim 1 31 08 Mot temp2 fltLim whichever is lower Parameters 179 31 06 Mot temp2 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection 2 When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31 05 Mot temp2 prot Note If one FEN xx module is used par
283. urve freq5 Defines the frequency at the 5th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 5th point frequency 38 09 UT curve volt1 Defines the voltage at the 1st point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 20096 1st point voltage 38 10 U f curve volt2 Defines the voltage at the 2nd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 20096 2nd point voltage 38 11 UT curve volt3 Defines the voltage at the 3rd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 20096 3rd point voltage 38 12 UT curve volt4 Defines the voltage at the 4th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 20096 Ath point voltage 1 7 196 38 13 UT curve volt5 Defines the voltage at the 5th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 5th point voltage 40 Motor control Motor control settings 40 01 Motor noise An optimization setting for balancing between control performance and motor noise level Maximizes inverter overloadability Default Control performance optimized for long motor cables 40 03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip 100 means full slip gain 0 means no slip gain The default value is 10096 Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip gain E
284. useful in applications vvith a high break avvay torque vvhere direct torque control DTC mode cannot be applied U IUN Relative output voltage IR compensation set to 15 Relative output voltage No lt IR compensation f Hz Field weakening point See also section IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive on page 74 0 00 50 00 Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor voltage 42 Mech brake ctrl Mechanical brake control configuration See also section Mechanical brake control on page 66 42 01 Brake ctrl Activates the brake control function with or without supervision Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running No Brake control disabled With ack Brake control enabled with supervision supervision is activated by parameter 42 02 Brake acknowl 202 Parameters Name Value 42 02 Brake acknowl 42 03 Open delay 0 00 5 00 s 42 04 Close delay 0 00 60 00 s 42 05 Close speed 0 O 1000 0 rpm Brake control enabled without supervision Selects the source for the external brake on off supervision activation when parameter 42 01 Brake ctrl is set to With ack The use of the external on off supervision signal is optional 1 The brake is open 0 The brake is closed Brake supervision is usually controlled with a digital input It can also be controlled with an external control system e g fieldbus When a brake control error is det
285. usting a bit pointer setting on the optional control panel Const is selected in order to fix the value to 0 displayed as C False or 1 C True Pointer is selected to define a source from another parameter A pointer value is given in the format P xx yy zz where xx parameter group yy parameter index zz bit number Pointing to a nonexisting bit will be interpreted as 0 FALSE In addition to the Const and Pointer selections bit pointer settings may also have other pre selected settings FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication Value pointer setting A parameter value that points to the value of another actual signal or parameter A pointer value is given in the format P xx yy where xx parameter group yy parameter index 94 Parameters Parameter listing 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive IE 01 01 Motor speed rpm Filtered actual speed in rom The used speed feedback is 100 1 rpm defined by parameter 19 02 Speed fb sel The filter time constant can be adjusted using parameter 19 03 MotorSpeed filt 01 06 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque See also 10 1 parameter 01 29 Torq nom scale 01 07 Dc voltage Measured intermediate circuit voltage 100 1V 01 08 Encoder1 speed Encoder 1 speed in rpm 100 1 rpm 01 09 Encoder1 pos Actual position of e
286. ut DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 1074070019 114 Parameters Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 13 Em stop off3 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF3 signal The drive is stopped along the emergency stop ramp time defined by parameter 22 12 Em stop time 0 OFF3 active Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIOS as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 10 15 Em stop off1 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF1 signal The drive is stopped using the active deceleration time Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw 0 OFF1 active Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 i DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 po Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 Parameters 115 10 17 Start enable Selects the source for the start enable signal 1 Start enable If the
287. ut output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Torque control Torque reference is 03 12 Torg ref sp lim 2 Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector 3 compares the torque reference and the speed controller output and the smaller of the two is used Max Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector 4 compares the torque reference and the speed controller output and the greater of the two is used Add Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector 5 adds the speed controller output to the torque reference 12 05 Ext2 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location 2 Speed control Torque reference is 03 09 Torq ref sp ctrl 1 Torque control Torque reference is 03 12 Torg ref sp lim Parameters 119 Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector compares the torque reference and the speed controller output and the smaller of the two is used Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector compares the torque reference and the speed controller output and the greater of the two is used Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector adds the speed controller output to the torque reference 13 Analogue inputs Analog input signal processing 13 01 Al filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1 Unfiltered signal 100 2 Filtered signal 1 7
288. utophasing mode has no effect Rotor 8 Absolute encoder resolver Constant speeds It is possible to predefine up to 7 constant speeds Constant speeds can be activated for example through digital inputs Constant speeds override the speed reference Settings Parameter group 26 Constant speeds page 166 Critical speeds A Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of for example mechanical resonance problems Settings Parameter group 25 Critical speed page 167 DC voltage control B Overvoltage control Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is needed with two quadrant line side converters when the motor operates within the generating quadrant To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached 60 Program features B Undervoltage control If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed Note Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit e g UPS to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a s
289. value 238 Additional parameter data Fieldbus addresses Refer to the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication Value and bit pointer parameters are transferred between the fieldbus adapter and drive as 32 bit integer values E 32 bit integer value pointers When a value pointer parameter is connected to the value of another parameter the format is as follows Description Value pointer is Group of source Index of source connected to parameter parameter parameter When a value pointer parameter is connected to a solution program the format is as follows 0 2 Description Value pointer is Relative address of connected to solution solution program program variable Note Value pointer parameters connected to a solution program are read only via fieldbus Additional parameter data 239 E 32 bit integer bit pointers When a bit pointer parameter is connected to value 0 or 1 the format is as follows 0 Bit pointer is connected 7 7 0 False 1 True to 0 1 When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a bit value of another parameter the format is as follows 2 255 1 255 oa Description Bit pointer is Bit selection Group of Index of connected to source source signal bit parameter parameter value When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a solution program the format is as follows Description Bit pointer is
290. value defined by parameter 13 17 A 4 max Al scaled 13 20 Al4 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input Al4 value defined by parameter 13 18 A 4 min See the drawing at parameter 13 19 Al4 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al4 value 32768 000 13 21 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input Al5 See parameter 13 01 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 13 22 Al5 max Defines the maximum value for analogue input Al5 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 Al5 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 23 Al5 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input Al5 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 AI5 minimum value 1000 1 unit 11 000 V 124 Parameters 13 24 Al5 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analogue input Al5 value defined by parameter 13 22 A 5 max Al scaled 13 25 5 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analogue input Al5 value defined by parameter 13 23 A 5 min See the drawing at parameter 13 24 A 5 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al5 value 32768 000
291. var3 min Minimum value for process variable 3 See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 1 32768 32768 Minimum value for process variable 3 1 36 Timed functions Configuration of timers See also section Timers on page 77 36 01 Timers enable Enable disable control for timers Whenever the source selected by this parameter is off timers are disabled when the source is on timers are enabled Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Parameters 195 No Mamay p Bast es ited by 0207 DI latas 5 107407007 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 DIO5 Digital input output DIO5 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 7 Digital input output DIO6 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074070019 bit 5 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 93 36 02 Timers mode Specifies whether the time periods defined by parameters 36 03 Start time1 36 18 Stop day4 are valid daily or weekly s mode 7 1 Weekly Timer3 mode 0 Daily 1 Weekly 0 Daily 1 Weekly 36 03 Start time Defines the start time for time period 1 00 00 00 Start time for time period 1 1 15 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 04 Stop time1 Defines the stop time for time period 1 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 1 1 1s 24 00
292. w the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input Jog enable Jogging enabled by the source set by parameter 10 09 Jog enable Start cmd State of the drive start command Speed Jogging example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Time Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 64 Program features Jog Jog mesc oni LIED penan 2 23 AEREA Drive runs at the jogging speed 3 4 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 5 6 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 67 1111 Drive runs at the jogging speed ho a Jog enable is not active normal operation continues x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference R RI Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp 10 11 x 010 Drive is stopped 11 12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp 12 13 Start command overrides the jog enable signal 13 14 1 1 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 14 15 LLLA Drive runs at the jogging speed Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function Note Jogging is no
293. x REAL 32 saree saree somo 521 Procvarsmin REM s aerar 30 5 252 Additional parameter data CAE en Factory macro Beo mers n n aner T ome 3602 rin s mode ps s 909 sos st nim r umma s2 o00000 240000 00000 604 Sop m r ns 32 000000 240000 990090 sos eum 1 nr May 38 06 sopday eum si vr T May arm Tunraz 32 000000260000 mmm ECL T us ESSEN UN ES ON 56 09 Ser day f eum is nr May 5670 Sep aye emm 5 nr meme Str tines umma s o00000 240000 00000 Spine mee pese im eum is 7 May 6 14 Sopdaya eum 7 My nmt Tunraz xr mom sn T mmm 35 76 Stop times 32 000000 240000 900090 is 7 f emm is 7 May 35 76 Stop dayd eum si 7 hom is Boosts iome 2 1 crmsE 620 Boostime TS 32 00000 240000 080090 izi rm dnner Pb is ooo com onu 3622 Timedtunce Po 16 000000 00mm 900 3623 rmed anes Po te ooo com omo 624 rmedines Ps 16 oso om T 9000 sos ufcuvetne eum 16 o2 ew E E ane vant rex x 38 0 H n ER MN jaf 8 E T wm x am ais Ufoume vats REA 0 mo o
294. xample with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite of the full slip gain 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm The static speed error is 1000 rpm 998 rpm 2 rpm To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased At the 105 gain value no static speed error exists 2 rpm 40 rpm 5 200 Slip gain Parameters 201 40 04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve When the voltage reserve has decreased to the set value the drive enters the field weakening area If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Uy 550 V and the voltage reserve is 5 the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady state operation is 0 95 x 550 V sqrt 2 369 V The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier 4 50 Voltage reserve 40 06 Force open loop Defines the speed position information used by the motor model False Motor model uses the speed feedback selected by parameter 19 02 Speed fb sel True Motor model uses the internal speed estimate even when parameter 19 02 Speed fb sel is set to Enc1 speed Enc2 speed 40 07 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed IR compensation The function is
295. y of the preselected values and to return to the parameters list To freely define a bit of a binary parameter as the value choose Pointer and press wi The parameter group index and bit will be shown Select the parameter group with AS and SY 2 The text below the cursor displays the currently selected parameter group Press y to select the parameter index Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting Press lt to select the bit Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting To save the new value for the pointer parameter press iwi The new value is shown in the parameters list LOC t PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl P 02 01 05 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC B PARAMETERS 1002 Extl start inl DI6 1003 Extl start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func 1005 Ext2 start 1n1 EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC t PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl P 04 01 00 02 I O values CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOCU PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl 0201 DI status CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC t PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl P 02 01 9 H 01 DI2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC 2 PARAMETERS 1002 Extl start inl P 02 01 01 1003 Extl start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func 1005 Ext2 start inl EXIT 00 00 EDIT 28 The ACS850 control panel How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to fixed 0 FALSE or 1 TRUE The bit pointer parameter can be fixed to constant value of 0 FALSE or 1 TRUE When adjusting a bit pointer p

ACS850 Standard Program Firmware Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents